Toshiba Work Light e Studio160 User Manual

DIGITAL MULTI FUNCTION

e-STUDIO160/200/250

File No. SHE02000200

R02092123800-TTEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND

SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO160/200/250 SERIES

The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.

1. Transportation

•

When transporting/installing the copier, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions as

indicated below.

The copier is fairly heavy and weighs approximately 50 kg (110 lb), therefore pay full attention

when handling it.

4 portions

2. Installation

•

Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115 or 120V/15A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) or more for its

power source.

The copier must be grounded for safety.

Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.

Select a suitable place for installation.

Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.

Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone.

To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80

cm (32") on the left, 80 cm (32") on the right and 10 cm (4") in the rear.

After having installed the copier, be sure to push the carrying handles into the copier.

•

3. Service of Machines

•

Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.

Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the

damp heater and their periphery.

•

Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers and the high-voltage transformer.

Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fans, etc.

When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections

and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.

•

Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO160/200/250 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.

– Avoid direct exposure to beam.

– Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.

– Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.

4. Main Service Parts for Safety

•

The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important

for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.

5. Cautionary Labels

•

During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the

power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on their

surface and whether they are properly stuck to the copier.

6. Disposition of Consumable Parts/Packing Materials

•

Regarding the recovery and disposal of the copier, supplies, consumable parts and packingm a -

terials, it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules.

7. When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disas-

sembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be

careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings,

toothed washers in the wrong places.

8. Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or dis-

assembled.

9. Precautions Against Static Electricity

•

The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband,

because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity.

Caution: Before using the wrist band, pull out the power cord plug of the copier and make

sure that there is no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.

Caution: Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to the

manufacturer's instructions.

Attention: Se débarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs usés y compris les batteries en lithium

selon les instructions du fabricant.

Vorsicht: Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie)

nach Angaben des Herstellers.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS .................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Error Code List ................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Self-Diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.2.1 Adjust mode (05)..................................................................................................... 1-8

1.2.2 System mode ........................................................................................................ 1-13

1.2.3 User test mode...................................................................................................... 1-18

1.2.4 Function test ......................................................................................................... 1-21

1.2.5 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................... 1-38

1.2.6 SERVICE LIST ...................................................................................................... 1-43

1.2.7 Country/Region code ............................................................................................ 1-49

1.2.8 Scanner parking mode.......................................................................................... 1-50

1.2.9 Speaker volume .................................................................................................... 1-51

1.2.10 Adjustment of document width sensor .................................................................. 1-52

1.3 Image Quality Control ...................................................................................................... 1-53

1.4 Copy Image Dimension Adjustment ................................................................................. 1-54

1.4.1 Adjustment of paper aligning value ....................................................................... 1-55

1.4.2 Printer unit adjustment .......................................................................................... 1-56

1.4.3 Scanner unit adjustment ....................................................................................... 1-61

1.5 Sharpness (HPF) Adjustment .......................................................................................... 1-66

1.6 Gamma Slope Correction................................................................................................. 1-67

1.7 High-Voltage Adjustment.................................................................................................. 1-68

1.7.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 1-68

1.7.2 Precautions ........................................................................................................... 1-71

1.8 Adjusting the Scanner Section ......................................................................................... 1-74

1.8.1 Installing glass ...................................................................................................... 1-74

1.8.2 Installing scanner motor ........................................................................................ 1-76

1.8.3 Adjusting the carriage 1 ........................................................................................ 1-77

1.8.4 Installing carriage 2............................................................................................... 1-79

1.8.5 CCD unit ............................................................................................................... 1-82

1.9 Adjusting the main drive gear assembly........................................................................... 1-86

1.10 MAIN PWA replacement procedure ................................................................................. 1-90

1.11 Measurement of Transfer Guide Bias ............................................................................... 1-92

1.12 Adjustment of the doctor-sleeve gap................................................................................ 1-94

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO160/200/250 CONTENTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Maintenance Performed Every 81,000 (e-STUDIO160/200 Series) and

99,000 Copies (e-STUDIO250 Series)............................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Preventive Maintenance Check List .................................................................................... 2-1

2.3 PM Kit................................................................................................................................ 2-14

2.4 List of Adjustment Tools .................................................................................................... 2-15

2.5 List of Grease .................................................................................................................... 2-15

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES......................................... 3-1

3.1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies........................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Pressure Roller .................................................................. 3-2

3.3 Checking and Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller................................................................... 3-2

3.4 Checking and Cleaning of the Heat Roller ......................................................................... 3-3

3.5 Checking and Replacing of the Transfer Guide Roller ........................................................ 3-3

3.6 Checking and Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum............................................................. 3-4

3.7 Checking and Cleaning of Drum Cleaning Blade ............................................................... 3-5

4. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Troubleshooting Based on Error Code ............................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Transporting jam in the main body .......................................................................... 4-2

4.1.2 Paper feeding jam ................................................................................................... 4-7

4.1.3 Transporting jam for the optional trays .................................................................. 4-13

4.1.4 Paper jam if some cover is opened ....................................................................... 4-18

4.1.5 Paper transporting jam at the ADF........................................................................ 4-22

4.1.6 Paper transporting jam at the RADF ..................................................................... 4-24

4.1.7 Paper jam in finisher ............................................................................................. 4-26

4.1.8 Drive system service call ...................................................................................... 4-30

4.1.9 Temporary paper supply mechanism service call ................................................. 4-33

4.1.10 Optical system service call ................................................................................... 4-39

4.1.11 Process system service call.................................................................................. 4-41

4.1.12 Fuser system service call ..................................................................................... 4-41

4.1.13 Communications system service call .................................................................... 4-42

4.1.14 ADF or RADF system service call......................................................................... 4-44

4.1.15 Other abnormal service call .................................................................................. 4-48

4.1.16 Laser optical system service call .......................................................................... 4-49

4.1.17 Finisher related service call .................................................................................. 4-50

4.1.18 Scanner related service call.................................................................................. 4-55

4.1.19 Printer related service call .................................................................................... 4-56

4.1.20 Fax related service call ......................................................................................... 4-56

4.1.21 OCT system service call ....................................................................................... 4-57

4.1.22 Other service call .................................................................................................. 4-57

4.2 Troubleshooting of Image ................................................................................................. 4-58

e-STUDIO160/200/250 CONTENTS

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ........................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.2 Using the Recovery PWA ................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.1 Using main recovery PWA ...................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.2 Using the scanner recovery PWA ........................................................................... 5-5

5.3 Using the Batch File ........................................................................................................... 5-8

5.3.1 Creating Download Disks........................................................................................ 5-8

5.3.2 Downloading ......................................................................................................... 5-13

5.4 Using the TOSHIBA Viewer .............................................................................................. 5-20

6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................. 6-1

6.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 6-1

APPENDIX .......................................................................................................................... A-1

Appendix A. Specifications.........................................................................................................A-1

Appendix B. Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-5

Appendix C. Options ..................................................................................................................A-6

Appendix D. Replacement Units/Supplies ..................................................................................A-6

Appendix E. System List ............................................................................................................A-7

Appendix F. Power Supply Unit..................................................................................................A-8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO160/200/250 CONTENTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

(PM)

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR

STORING & HANDLING

SUPPLIES

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

5. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

6. WIRE HARNESS

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1.1 Error Code List

While the error message or “Call for service” symbol is flashing, pressing the [CLEAR/STOP] key and

the [8] key on the digital keys at the same time shows one of the following error codes on the copy-

quantity indicator as long as those keys are pressed.

Classification

Transporting jam in the main

body

Error code

E01

Machine status

Paper jam inside the machine

E02

Paper jam near the fuser unit

E03

Paper remaining inside the machine at power on (Except

for ADF/RADF)

E04 to E07 Reserved

E08

E09

E10

E11

E12

E13

E14

E15

E16

Transporting jam inside the ADU

Time out error that occurs at the paper feeding sensor

Reserved

Paper feeding jam

Paper feeding jam at the ADU

Paper feeding jam at the SFB

Cassette 1 feeding jam

Cassette 2 feeding jam (PFU)

Cassette 3 feeding jam (PFP)

Cassette 4 (CM) feeding jam (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

E17 to E18 Reserved

E19

LCF feeding jam (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

E20 to E30 Reserved

Transporting jam for the

optional trays

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

Paper not reach to feed sensor from cassette 2, so paper

jam inside the main unit during cassette 2 feed

Paper not reach to feed sensor from cassette 3 or 4, so

paper jam inside the main unit during the feed

Paper not reach to feed sensor from LCF cassette.

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Paper not reach to 2nd cassette feed sensor from cas-

sette 3 or 4. (Cassette 4 is e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Paper jam in cassette 4 transport path

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Paper jam in LCF transport path

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

E37 to E40 Reserved

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Classification

Paper jam if some cover is

opened

Error code

E41

Machine status

Copier front cover or side cover is opened during copying

(Copier front cover, side cover, or transport cover of job

separator/offset tray/bridge cover is opened during

copying)

E42

Side cover of cassette 2 or cassette 3 is opened during

copying

E43

E44

E45

ADU is opened during copying

Reserved

Side cover of LCF is opened during copying

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

E46 to E70 Reserved

Paper transporting jam at the E71

Original feeding jam at the feeding area of the ADF or

RADF

ADF or RADF

E72

Original transporting jam at the transporting area of the

ADF or RADF

E73

E74

Original exiting jam at the exiting area of the ADF or RADF

Original reversing jam at the reversing area of the RADF

E75 to EA0 Reserved

Paper jam in the finisher

EA1

EA2

EA3

Paper transport delay jam

Paper transport stop jam

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Paper remaining on the finisher transport path at power

EA4

EA5

EA6

EA7

Finisher is opened during copying

Finisher staple jam

Finisher early arrival jam

Set transport jam before stapling

EA8 to EAE Reserved

EAF

Stapled set transport jam

EB1 to EZ9 Reserved

Life end

Process unit life nearly end

Toner is nearly empty

Other operator calls

No toner cartridge

Toner empty

No process unit

Process unit life end

Upper tray of the job separator is full

Lower tray of the job separator is full

Offset tray is full

Finisher tray is full (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Classification

Error code

Machine status

Internal tray full (when finisher bridge installed)

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Other operator calls

No paper in the cassette 1

No paper in the cassette 2

No paper in the cassette 3

No paper in the cassette 4 (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

No paper in the LCF (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Cassette 1 is not ready

Cassette 2 is not ready

Cassette 3 is not ready

Cassette 4 is not ready (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

LCF is not installed (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Front cover or side cover of the copier is open

Cover of the job separator is open

Cover of the off set catch tray is open

Cover of the bridge cover is open

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Cover of the ADU is open

Side cover of the cassette 2 is open

Side cover of the cassette 3 is open

Side cover of the LCF is open

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Finisher joint is open (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

No staples (displayed only when stapling is designated)

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

CALL SERVICE from drive

system

C01

Main motor drive error

C02 to C03 Reserved

C04

C05

C06

PFP main motor drive error

Reserved

Temporary paper supply

mechanism error

LCF feed motor error (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

C07 to C10 Reserved

C11 to C12 Reserved

C13

C14

C15

C16

C17

C18

C19

C20

Cassette 1 error

Cassette 2 error

Cassette 3 error

Cassette 4 error (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Reserved

LCF tray error (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

LCF feed motor abnormal (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Reserved

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 3

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Classification

CALL SERVICE from the

optical system

Error code

C21

Machine status

Carriage initialization error

C22 to C24 Reserved

C25

C26

Scanner unit watch dog error

Exposure lamp disconnection or peak detection error

C27 to C30 Reserved

C31 to C37 Reserved

CALL SERVICE from the

process system

C38

Replaced process unit error

C39 to C40 Reserved

CALL SERVICE from fuser

area

C41

C42

C43

Abnormal thermistor or heater disconnection at power ON

Reserved

Warming up mode after disconnection judgment, or ab-

normal thermistor after ready

C44

Warming up mode after disconnection judgment, or heater

abnormal after ready

C45

Thermistor disconnection at the end part of heater

C46 to C50 Reserved

CALL SERVICE from commu- C51 to C55 Reserved

nication

C56

C57

Communication error between PFC and main unit

Communication error between main unit and IPC

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

C58

Communication error between IPC and finisher

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

C59 to C70 Reserved

CALL SERVICE from ADF or C71

Paper supply motor lock error

Reserved

RADF

C72

C73

C74

EE-PROM initialization error

Defective adjustment by the exit/reversal sensor detected

C75 to C80 Reserved

C81

C82

Fan motor lock error

Document aligning lower sensor (RADF)/Aligning sensor

(ADF) adjustment error

C83

Size length adjustment error

C84 to C89 Reserved

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Classification

Error code

C90

Machine status

CALL SERVICE from others

Reserved

C91

SRAM abnormality (Lithium battery or SRAM chip are

abnormal.)

C92 to C94 Reserved

C95

C96

C97

C98

C99

Power supply unit fan motor abnormality

Process unit fan motor abnormality

Vacuum fan motor abnormality

Clock IC abnormality

CALL SERVICE from laser

optical system

PFC microcomputer abnormal

Polygon motor abnormal

HSYNC abnormal

CALL SERVICE from finisher CA1

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

CA2

CA3 to CB0 Reserved

CB1

CB2

CB3

CB4

CB5

Reserved

Exit motor abnormal

Reserved

Staple motor abnormal

CB6 to CC2 Reserved

CC3

Set processing motor abnormal

CC4 to CC7 Reserved

CC8

CC9

CCA

CCB

Front aligning motor abnormal

Upper tray elevator motor abnormal

Lower tray elevator motor abnormal

Rear aligning motor abnormal

CCC to CD0 Reserved

F01 to F10 Reserved

Reserved

Scanner I/F

F11

F12

F13

F14

Scanner I/F error

Write error at downloading the scanner unit program

Download sector error of the scanner unit program

Scanner unit F-ROM error

F15 to F20 Reserved

FAX unit

F31

Modem IC does not work normal

F32 to F40 Reserved

Offset catch tray

Reserved

F41

Initial detection error of the offset catch tray

F42 to F99 Reserved

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2 Self-Diagnosis Modes

The self-diagnosis functions are used to make the settings for the various PPC functions. This document

describes the self-diagnosis functions.

For the FAX functions, refer to the SERVICE HANDBOOK (GD-1061).

For the method to enter each mode of the self-diagnosis functions, refer to the following chart.

Mode

How to enter

Definition

How to clear

Country/Region Turn the power on while Selects the country/region code. *1

code

pressing the 0 and 2 keys.

Adjust mode

Turn the power on while Finely adjusts copy image quality. Turn the power off.

pressing the 0 and 5 keys. Confirmation printing enabled by

pressing the INTERRUPT key.

System mode

Turn the power on while Performs setups for the system, Turn the power off.

pressing the 0 and 8 keys. maintenance, operations, printer,

scanner, etc.

Scanner parking Turn the power on while Fixes the scanner carriage in place Turn the power off.

mode

pressing the 0 and 9 keys. when transporting the copier.

Turn the power on while Clears values excluding the ones *2

pressing the 1, 3, and * keys. set in 08-446/447 and in the Ad-

just mode (05).

RAM clear

Service mode

Press the PROGRAM key Performs setups for FUNCTION Press the

*3 while REDAY is indicated, TEST and MAINTENANCE, and PROGRAM key,

and then press the *, #, *, prints the Service List.

then * keys.

and then press the

*, #, *, then * keys.

FUNCTION

TEST

After entering the service Conducts OPE. PANEL TEST, Or turn the power

mode, select it on the screen. PRINT TEST, MODEM TEST, etc. off.

This mode is selected by

turning the power on while

pressing the 1 and 3 keys.

Or press the

COPY key, or

press the MAIN

MAINTENANCE After entering Service Mode, Performs setups for Memory Clear, MENU key.

select it on the screen. facsimile function, etc.

After entering Service Mode, Prints PROTOCOL TRACE, Total

select it on the screen. Error, FUNCTION LIST, etc.

Service list

*1: After inputting the country/region code, the copier automatically enters the warm up mode.

*2: After the RAM clear, the machine automatically enters the warm up mode.

*3: In the SERVICE MODE, each function of the FUNCTION TEST, MAINTENANCE, or SERVICE LIST

in each test item of the TEST MODE (displayed by pressing the PROGRAM key), are added. When

the copier enters this mode, these functions are available.

*4 The copier enters into the service mode by pressing 1 and 3 keys while turning the power on. To exit

from the service mode, turn the power off.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power ON

"02"

"13*"

"05"

"08"

"13"

"09"

Country/Region

code

RAM clear

Adjust mode System mode Function test Scanner parking mode

"INT" "INT"

Warming up

Test print

Power OFF

"INT" : INTERRUPT key on.

Standby

Quick reference chart for self-diagnostic mode

01-02-01

Note: Power ON

Turn on the power switch.

Press the INTERRUPT key.

Press the CLEAR/STOP key.

Power OFF

INT

C/S

Menu map

The menu below can be selected by pressing the program key. (However, the menu in the broken-dotted

box are displayed only when the copier enters the SERVICE MODE.)

01. DEFAULT SETTINGS

02. LISTS

03. INITIAL SETUP

04. MENU LIST

05. TEST MODE

01. AUTO TEST

02. INDIVIDUAL TEST

03. TEST RESULT LIST

04. FUNCTION TEST

05. MAINTENANCE

06. SERVICE LIST

01. OPE PANEL TEST

02. PRINT TEST

01. MEMORY CLEAR

02. SET FUNCTION

01. PROTOCOL TRACE

02. TOTAL ERRORS

Service mode

01-02-02

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.1 Adjust mode (05)

TEST MODE A

MC=

Power ON

Enter code

Digital Keys

( C/S used to correct value)

TEST MODE A

MC=

SET

START

205

Enter code

Adjustment value

Digital Keys

TEST MODE A

MC=205

SET

DT=

156

START

Adjustment value

Cancel

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADJUST MODE (05) ITEMS

Process unit adjustment

Code

Factor

Adjustment item (05)

Mode

ALL

Default

Acceptable Refer to

value

0-255

page

1-70

205 Development Developer bias DC adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D (Up/Down) key

156

(166)

• Real-time high voltage output

• Developer bias DC ON

210

Charging

Grid voltage initial value adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

• Real-time high voltage output (Charge ON)

ALL

104

0-255

Guaranteed

value

1-70

(118)

0-223

220

221

233

234

235

261

Transfer

Transfer transformer DC output High adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

ALL

180

0-255

1-70

• Real-time high voltage output (Transfer High ON)

Transfer transformer DC output Center adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

142

0-255

(155)

• Real-time high voltage output (Transfer Center ON)

Separation output High adjustment

Separation

Laser

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

• Real-time high voltage output (Separation-High ON)

Separation output Center adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

• Real-time high voltage output (Separation-Center ON)

Separation output Low adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

• Real-time high voltage output (Separation-Low ON)

Laser power 600 DPI Initial value adjustment

• Increment/decrement by U/D key

(53)

• No polygon rotation

• Real-time laser output

(Results of automatic laser adjustment)

(Laser ON)

*1 : The value in parentheses is for the model e-STUDIO200/250 series.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 9

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning adjustment

Code

304

Factor

Adjustment item (05)

Mode

ALL

Default

128

Acceptable Refer to

value

0-255

page

1-62

Scanner

mechanism

Scanner

mechanism

Scanner

mechanism

R/ADF

Scanner feed magnification

0.1 %/step

305

Scanner feed misalignment

CCD scanning misalignment

0.126 mm/step

(600 DPI)

ALL

128

85-171

5-251

1-63

1-61

306

0.04233 mm/step ALL

128

354

355

356

R/ADF aligning amount (surface)

RADF aligning amount (back)

0.5 mm/step

ALL

0-20

RADF

R/ADF

ADF position sensor adjustment or RADF sensor automatic ALL

adjustment

357

358

R/ADF

R/ADF transport speed fine adjustment 0.1 %/step

R/ADF horizontal misalignment adjustment

ALL

0-100

0-255

128

0.04233 mm/step

RADF top position adjustment (surface) 0.1 mm/step

RADF top position adjustment (back) 0.1 mm/step

365

366

380

R/ADF

RADF

ADF

ALL

0-100

ADF document width sensor adjustment, narrowest document ALL

1-52

guide width

381

ADF

ADF document width sensor adjustment, widest document ALL

guide width

*1 : The entry of code enables automatic adjustment.

Printer adjustment

Code

Factor

Adjustment item

Mode

PPC

Default

128

Acceptable Refer to

Value

page

1-56

400 Printer system Polygon motor speed fine adjustment 600 DPI

0.2%/step

108-148

410 Printer system Laser start position 600 DPI

417 Printer system Laser start position 600 DPI

418 Printer system Laser start position 600 DPI

419 Printer system Laser start position 600 DPI

421 Printer system Main motor speed fine adjustment

Cassette 1

PPC

108

106

119

128

0-255

78-178

0-30

1-57

1-58

1-64

1-65

1-59

1-55

Cassette 2

Cassette 3/LCF

Cassette 4

Approx. 0.1%/step PPC 124 (130)

430 Printer system Top margin

431 Printer system Left margin

432 Printer system Right margin

433 Printer system Bottom margin

0.7 mm/step

0.1 mm/step

PPC

ALL

0-255

0-40

440 Printer system Top position Cassette 1

441 Printer system Top position Cassette 2

442 Printer system Top position Bypass (SFB)

443 Printer system Top position LCF

0.4 mm/step

0-15

444 Printer system Top position PFP

445 Printer system Top position ADU

0-15

450 Printer system Aligning amount Copier cassette (Cassette 1)

Long size (0.52 mm/step) Paper length of min. 259 mm

451 Printer system Aligning amount Copier cassette (Cassette 1)

Short size (0.52 mm/step) Paper length of max. 258 mm

452 Printer system Aligning amount Cassette 2 (PFU)

Long size (0.52 mm/step) Paper length of min. 322 mm

0-31

ALL

0-31

1-55

*1 : The value in parentheses is for the model e-STUDIO200/250 series.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 10

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer adjustment

Code

Factor

Adjustment item

Mode

ALL

Default

Acceptable Refer to

Value

0-31

page

1-55

453 Printer system Aligning amount Cassette 2 (PFU)

Short size (0.52 mm/step) Paper length of max. 321 mm

455 Printer system Aligning amount ADU

(e-STUDIO160: 0.7 mm/step, e-STUDIO200/250: 0.47 mm/step)

ALL

(23) *1

0-31

1-55

456 Printer system Aligning amount PFP Short size (0.52 mm/step)

Paper length of max. 321 mm

ALL

457 Printer system Aligning amount LCF

0.52 mm/step

ALL

0-31

1-55

458 Printer system Aligning amount Bypass (SFB) Short size (0.52 mm/step )

Paper length of max. 258 mm

463 Printer system Aligning amount PFP Long size (0.52 mm/step)

Paper length of min. 322 mm

ALL

PPC

0-31

1-55

1-57

465 Printer system Aligning amount Bypass Long size (0.52 m/step)

Paper length of min. 259 mm

497 Printer system Laser start position 600 DPI Bypass

101

0-255

*1 : The value in parentheses is for the model e-STUDIO200/250 series.

Scan image processing parameter 600 DPI

Image

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Adjustment item

quality

mode

Photo

Default

139

133

130

501 Density Manual density fine adjustment Center PPC

value

0-255

L ← V → D

0-255

1-53

503 Density Ditto

PPC Text/Photo

L ← V → D

0-255

504 Density Ditto

PPC

Text

L ← V → D

0-255

505 Density Manual density fine adjustment Light step PPC Text/Photo

value

V → L

0-255

506 Density Ditto

PPC

Photo

V → L

0-255

507 Density Ditto

PPC

Text

V → L

0-255

508 Density Manual density fine adjustment Dark step PPC Text/Photo

value

V → D

0-255

509 Density Ditto

PPC

Photo

V → D

0-255

510 Density Ditto

Text

V → D

0-255

512 Density Auto density fine adjustment

514 Density Ditto

Photo

140

133

130

L ← V → D

0-255

PPC Text/Photo

L ← V → D

0-255

515 Density Ditto

PPC

Text

L ← V → D

0-9

593 Density ϒ data inclination correction

594 Density ϒ data inclination correction

595 Density ϒ data inclination correction

PPC Text/Photo

1-67

PPC

Photo

Text

0-9

*1 L: Light, V: Value, D: Dark

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 11

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan image processing parameter 600 DPI

Image

quality

mode

Image

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Adjustment item

Default

620 Image No. of units: HPF table number

PPC Text/Photo

0-99

1-66

quality

0: Use of default value

1: Text/Photo mode

The larger the intensity

coefficient the stronger the

intensity.

2: Photo mode

3: For Text mode

4 - 9: Unused

No. of tens: Filter combination intensity

0: Use of default value

1 - 9: Filter combination intensity

621 Image Ditto

quality

PPC

Photo

Text

0-99

1-66

622 Image Ditto

quality

693 Density Range correction on original set on the PPC Text/Photo

ADF or RADF.

11-14

21-24

31-34

41-44

Set whether the value of the background

peak and text peak are fixed or not.

If they are fixed, the range correction is

performed with standard values.

The values of the background peak and

text peak affect the reproduction of the

background density and text density re-

spectively.

The number of units: Data while automatic

density is selected.

The number of tens: Data while manual

density is selected.

Background peak

1: fixed

Text peak

fixed

2: varied

fixed

694

695

3: fixed

varied

Photo

Text

4: varied

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 12

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.2 System mode

TEST MODE D

MC=

Power ON

Enter code

Digital Keys

( C/S used to correct value)

TEST MODE D

MC=

SET

204

START

Enter code

Setting value

Digital Keys

TEST MODE D

MC=204

SET

DT=

START

Setting value

Cancel

SYSTEM MODE (08) ITEMS

Image

quality

mode

Acceptable

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Setting item

Mode

ALL

Default

value *1

0-3

202

204

SYS Selection of external counter

0: No external counter

1: With coil controller

2: Non-standard: With copylizer/key

card

3: With key counter

SYS Auto clear [sec]

ALL

0-15

0: Invalid 1: 15s 2: 30s 3: 45s 4: 60s

5: 75s 6: 90s 7: 105s 8: 120s

9: 135s 10: 150s 11: 180s 12: 210s

13: 240s 14: 270s 15: 300s

205

206

207

SYS Auto low power 0: Invalid 1: Valid

(Time is set on panel.)

ALL

0-1

SYS Auto sleep 0: Invalid 1: Valid

(Time is set on panel.)

SYS Display for key counter setting

0: Set key copy counter

1: ASK CASHIER TO SWITCH ON

* Valid when 08-202 is set to 3 (With key

counter).

*1 : The entry of code enables automatic execution.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYSTEM MODE (08) ITEMS

Image

quality

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Setting item

Mode

Default

224 SYS SFB paper size

0-14

0: A3 (8K) 1: A4 (16K) 2: A4R (16KR)

3: A5R 4: B4 5: B5 6: B5R

7: LETTER 8: LETTER-R

9: LEDGER 10: LEGAL

11: STATEMENT-R 12: COMPUTER

13: FOLIO 14: Undefined

15-17: Reserved

225

SYS Copier cassette paper size

NAD: 7

Other: 1

0-13

0: A3 (8K) 1: A4 (16K) 2: A4R (16KR)

3: A5R 4: B4 5: B5 6: B5R

7: LETTER 8: LETTER-R 9: LEDGER

10: LEGAL 11: STATEMENT-R

12: COMPUTER 13: FOLIO

14: Reserved 15: Reserved

SYS Cassette 2 paper size (Same as 08-225)

226

227

228

246

NAD: 7

Other: 1

NAD: 7

Other: 1

NAD: 7

Other: 1

0-13

0-1

SYS Cassette 3 paper size (Same as 08-225)

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

SYS Cassette 4 paper size (Same as 08-225)

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

SYS Clearing copy jobs at auto clear

0: No clearing 1: Clearing

250 MAINT Service personnel telephone number

ALL

20 digits

Own M/C registration area

0-999999

251 MAINT PM counter setting value

NAD:

e-STUDIO160/

200: 81000

e-STUDIO250:

99000

Othre: 0

252 MAINT PM counter present value

08-251: Operates when other than 0

Object of 08-352

255 MAINT PFP installation status

0: Auto (Automatically changed to 1

or 2 by observing the PFC cassette

installation status.)

ALL

0-999999

0-4

1: PFP (Cassette 3)

2: PFP (Cassette 3,4)

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

3: Reserved 4: None

256 MAINT LCF paper size

0: A4 1: LT 2: Reserved

300 OPE. MAX . 9

ALL

NAD: 1

Other: 0

0-2

0: 999

1: 99

2: 9

340 MAINT Drum end counter setting value.

ALL

e-STUDIO160/

200: 27000

e-STUDIO250:

33000

0-99999

(0: Not displayed)

351 COUNT Display of total counter data

(Confirmed by listing and changed by

memory writing)

352 COUNT A3/LD double count

0: Single count 1: Double count

ALL

Display only

0-1

355 COUNT Display of drum lite counter

374 COUNT ADF/RADF scan counter

ALL

Display only

0-999999

*1 : The entry of code enables automatic execution.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 14

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image

quality

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Setting item

Mode

Default

375 COUNT COPY job (print) counter

376 COUNT PRINTER job (print) counter

377 COUNT FAX job (print) counter

ALL

Double counted if printing

A3 or LD size paper

Double counted if printing

A3 or LD size paper

Double counted if printing

A3 or LD size paper

0-999999

385 COUNT Total counter in scanner unit (display)

386 COUNT Platen scan count

ALL

0-999999

388 COUNT LOAD instruction for total counter when ALL

replacing the main PWA Scanner unit →

Copier

1-90

389 COUNT SAVE instruction for total counter when ALL

replacing the scanner unit Copier → Scan-

ner unit

400 Process Thermistor heater status counter

0: No error occurrence

ALL

0-10

1: C41 1st thermistor or heater error

when starting W-UP

2: C41 2nd thermistor or heater error

when starting W-UP

3: Reserved

4: C43 Thermistor error during W-UP

5: C44 Heater error during W-UP

6: C43 Thermistor error after ready

7: C44 Heater error after ready

8: C45 Heater end thermistor error af-

ter ready (High temperature)

9: C44 High temperature heater error

10: C45 Heater end thermistor error af-

ter ready (Low temperature)

401 Process Drum life counter

402 Process Power on hours counter

(7-digit display: Hour 5-digit, minute 2-

digit)

0-999999

0-9999959

Counter area added

Total power ON hours

403 Process Fuser counter

Always double count for A3, B4, LD, LG,

COM, A4R, LTR, and FOLIO

404 Process Developer material counter.

Always double count for A3, B4, LD, LG,

COM, A4R, LTR, and FOLIO.

Clear by installing a new PU.

0-999999

Counter area added

0-999999

Counter area added

406 Process

Pre-run start time

ALL

0-7

0: Invalid 1: 30 sec 2: 35 sec

3: 40 sec 4: 45 sec 5: 50 sec

6: 55 sec 7: 60 sec

407 Process

Pre-run operation time

0-10

0: Invalid 1: 5 sec 2: 10 sec

3: 15 sec 4: 20 sec 5: 25 sec

6: 30 sec 7: 40 sec 8: 50 sec

9: 60 sec 10: 150 sec

(2)

408 Process

Pre-run operation time for thick paper

0: Invalid 1: 1 sec 2: 2 sec 3: 3 sec

4: 4 sec 5: 5 sec 6: 6 sec 7: 7 sec

8: 8 sec 9: 9 sec 10: 10 sec

11: 12 sec 12: 14 sec 13: 16 sec

14: 18 sec 15: 20 sec

ALL

0-15

*1 : The entry of code enables automatic execution.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image

quality

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Setting item

Mode

ALL

Default

410 Process Fixing temperature when printing

4: 170°C 5: 175°C 6: 180°C 7: 185°C

8: 190°C 9: 195°C 10: 200°C

11: 205°C 12: 210°C 13: 215°C

411 Process Fixing temperature when ready

0: 170°C 1: 175°C 2: 180°C 3: 185°C

4: 190°C 5: 195°C 6: 200°C

(10)

4-13

0-7

0-5

0-4

ALL

7: Drop control ON

412 Process Fixing temperature in low power state

0: OFF 1: 120°C 2: 130°C 3: 140°C

4: 150°C 5: 160°C

NAD: 5

Other: 4

(NAD: 3)

(Other: 2) *1

413 Process Fixing temperature for thick paper

0: Invalid 1: 195°C 2: 200°C 3: 205°C

4: 210°C

ALL

(2)

446 Process Correction for transfer output ON timing.

0-18

10 ms/step

0-18

10 ms/step

0-1

1-91

447 Process Correction for transfer output OFF timing. ALL

462

(0: -110 ms -----18: +70 ms)

(11) *1

(0: +110 ms -----18: -70 ms)

Setting for switchback operation to copy

mixed-size originals form RADF

0: Invalid 1: Valid

480 PRINT Cassette priority selection

0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: Cassette 1

3: Cassette 2 4: Cassette 3

5: Cassette 4

481 PRINT Auto cassette change

0: None 1: Normal

ALL

0-5

0-1

0-2

483 PRINT Polygon motor preceding start-up setting ALL

0: Valid (DF, platen) 1: Invalid

2: DF only

486 PRINT Time for suspension of the Polygonal mo- ALL

tor pre-running

(0: 15 sec, 1: 30 sec, 2: 45 sec)

0-2

0-8

503

Image Density default in image quality mode

PPC

ALL

processing

0: AUTO 1: Light 3 2: Light 2

3: Light 1 4: Center 5: Dark 1

6: Dark 2 7: Dark 3

Also reflected on panel.

F/W Special paper selection

0: FOLIO/B size

504

PPC

0-2

1: 13" LEGAL (South America only)

2: K size (China only)

550

603

Image Image mode default

ALL

0-2

processing

0: Standard 1: Photo 2: Text

F/W Auto duplex mode (when document is PPC

loaded into DF)

0: Invalid 1: Simplex/Duplex

2: Duplex/Duplex

604

F/W APS priority selection

0: APS 1: AMS 2: None (100%)

3: Reserved

F/W Book duplex document selection

0: Left-hand open 1: Right-hand open

F/W The function clear LED blinks. Blinks when PPC

the value is different from the present de-

fault value after copying (until auto clear

or all clear.)

PPC

0-3

611

614

0-1

0: Invalid (Always off) 1: Valid

*1 : The value in parentheses is for the model e-STUDIO200/250 series.

*2 : This value should be adjusted at the factory. Do not change the value in

the field. When the main PWA is replaced, it should be entered again.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 16

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image

quality

mode

Acceptable

value *1

Refer to

page

Code Factor

Setting item

Mode

PPC

Default

618

F/W Default setting for mixed size originals

0: OFF

1: ON

0-1

* Setting 08-618 to 1 (ON) and 08-641 to

4 (alternate) simultaneously is not al-

lowed.

620

635

F/W APS forced start (Exclude RADF)

0: Valid (One time pressing)

1: Reserved

Memory

PPC

0-2

0-1

2: Invalid

Process for last page (one-sided original) PPC

at duplex copying

0: One-side copy

1: Double-sided copy (blank paper is

added to as the last even numbered

page to output the copy in the same

orientation with previous pages.)

F/W Auto sort mode (when document is loaded PPC

into DF)

641

0-5

Also set on panel.

0: Invalid 1: Staple 2: Sort 3: Invalid

4: Vertical and horizon. alternate

5: Sort offset

* Setting 08-641 to 4 (alternate) and 08-

618 to 1 (ON) simultaneously is not al-

lowed.

642

F/W Sorter mode priority selection (at all clear) PPC

Also set on panel.

0-6

0: NON SORT 1: STAPLE 2: SORT

3: Reseved 4: ALTERNATION

5: SORT OFFSET

6: NON SORT OFFSET

F/W Initialization of finisher bin at all clear

0: Valid 1: Invalid

F/W Magazine sort setting

0: Left-hand open 1: Right-hand open

F/W 2in1/4in1 setting

0: Horizontal write 1: Vertical write

F/W Cascade operation setting

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

0: No cascade

648

649

650

652

ALL

0, 1

0-1

0-2

Expansion

PPC

Expansion

PPC

Expansion

PPC

1: 1 → 2 (Endless stack included)

2. Reserved

665

673

F/W Set PPC area default.

05: Adjust area, γ adjust store area

08: Setting (PPC-FUNC) area

(Except the counter values)

Resetting drum-related counters,

08-355, 08-401.

Self-

check

1-90

Self-

check

(Valid when 08-689 is set to 1.)

Paper feeding by turns at duplex copying PPC

0: Invalid 1: Valid

685

688

0-1

0-4

UI shortcut key

0: Invalid

PPC

1: Valid (REDUCE/ENLARGE and ZOOM

UP/DOWN only)

2: Valid (Cassette paper size setting only)

3: Valid (All, REDUCE/ENLARGE, ZOOM

UP/DOWN, and cassette paper size

setting)

*1 : The entry of code enables automatic execution.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 17

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.3 User test mode

When you press the PROGRAM key and enter the TEST mode from the menu, the items that can be

tested by the user are displayed.

(1) AUTO TEST

This mode allows the user to independently diagnose the machine by automatically performing a

series of tests.

Press the PROGRAM key

PROGRAM

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

TEST MODE

Select TEST MODE

SET

Use or keys

01.AUTO TEST

02.INDIVIDUAL TEST

03.TEST RESULT LIST

AUTO TEST

Select AUTO TEST

Use or keys

-------------------

SET

Auto test run

It takes about 2 minutes to

finish TEST

AUTO TEST

Completed

End of TEST

Test Items

a) Flash ROM test

Calculates and compares the check sums of the firmware, function data and

language information with the previously stored corresponding check sum

values.

b) SRAM test

Same as Function Test.

c) DRAM test

d) MODEM test

e) SCANNER test

f) CODEC test

g) Printer test

Same as Function Test.

Checks each part of the printer (fan, HVPS, polygon, heater, LSU) and prints

one page of test pattern (not performed when there is no paper).

h) Phonebook data test Calculates and compares the check sum of the phonebook with the previ-

ously stored check sum value.

i) Network board test (with GF-1110)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 18

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) INDIVIDUAL TEST

The user can perform a test in interactive mode and locate the faulty point from the test result. The test

result is printed in the form of a report.

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

PROGRAM

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

Select TEST MODE

SET

Use or keys

TEST MODE

01.AUTO TEST

02.INDIVIDUAL TEST

03.TEST RESULT LIST

Select INDIVIDUAL TEST

SET

Use or keys

INDIVIDUAL TEST

01.ADF TEST

02.KEY TEST

03.LED LIST

TEST MODE

Select item to be tested

Use or keys

04.LCD TEST

TEST MODE

05.SPEAKER TEST

06.SWITCH TEST

07.TEST PRINT

SET

CIS

Selected test is performed

Test Items

a) ADF test

Transports and ejects originals to check the transport system. Transports

and ejects a certain number of originals and displays the number of the

originals. The tester checks that this value matches the number of the origi-

nals. A transport speed can be selected with the resolution key.

Press all the keys on the operation panel to check if they are detected nor-

mally. The key test ends when the STOP key is pressed in the end. If there is

any key which is not detected when pressed before the STOP key is pressed,

it will be judged to be an error.

b) Key test

c) LED test

d) LCD test

When the test is performed, all the LEDs will come on. If there is any LED

which is not lit when visually checked, it will be judged to be an error.

All the dots on the display go off (turn black). When the Start key is then

pressed, all the dots light (turn white). If there is any dot which does not light

or go off when visually checked, it will be judged to be an error.

Check that the volume level from the speaker changes.

e) Speaker test

f) Sensor test

Sensor test.

Open and close the covers by following the guidance appearing on the dis-

play.

g) Printer test

Checks the printer function by printing two test patterns.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 19

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) TEST RESULT LIST

Prints the results of (1) AUTO TEST and (2) INDIVIDUAL TEST.

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

PROGRAM

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

Select TEST MODE

SET

Use or keys

TEST MODE

01.AUTO TEST

02.INDIVIDUAL TEST

03.TEST RESULT LIST

Select TEST RESULT LIST

TEST RESULT LIST

Printing accepted

Use or keys

SET

Print TEST RESULT LIST

If there is any NG in the RESULT column, the corresponding test is problematic. An test with an

asterisk (*) cannot be executed unless the corresponding option is installed.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 20

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.4 Function test

The function test checks each function of the copier. To enter the function test mode, follow the procedure

below, or enter the Service mode (*,#,*,*) and select the menu for the function test

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

01.OPE.PANEL TEST

02.PRINT TEST

03.MODEM TEST

Select test menu

SET

The following tests can be conducted in the Function test mode.

01. OPE. PANEL TEST

02. PRINT TEST

03. MODEM TEST *1 (Factory test)

04. SENSOR TEST

05. SRAM TEST

06. DRAM TEST

07. CLOCK IC TEST

08. SCANNER TEST

09. CODEC TEST

10. OUTPUT TEST

11. PRINTER BOARD TEST *2

*1:

*2:

When the FAX kit (GD-1061) is not installed, the test is not present.

When the PCL kit (GA-1031) is not installed, the test is not present.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 21

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(1) 01. OPE PANEL TEST

This test checks the control panel display. When any key other than START and CLEAR/STOP is pressed

during the display test, O and X are displayed alternately in the lower right of the display.

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

01.OPE.PANEL TEST

02.PRINT TEST

03.MODEM TEST

Select test menu

01.OPE. PANEL TEST

All display dots keep turning on

SET

and off alternatery for one second

each. (All LEDs turn on.)

The cursor moves (from the

upper left to the lower right).

START

Cancel

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 22

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) 02. PRINT TEST

The test pattern is printed when a number is entered according to the displayed instructions

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

01.OPE.PANEL TEST

02.PRINT TEST

03.MODEM TEST

02.PRINT TEST Select test menu

Digital Keys

SET

Enter print code

PRINT TEST

115

Print code

Digital Keys

SET

Select paper cassette (C)

115

C=1

T=128

B=100

Digital Keys

SET

Print setup 1 (T)

Print setup 2 (B)

C = Paper cassette selection

T = Print setup 1

B = Print setup 2

Digital Keys

SET

0: Stack feed bypass (SFB)

1: 1st cassette

2: 2nd cassette (PFU)

3: 3rd cassette (PFP/LCF)

4: 4th cassette

START

C/S

Character density 0 to 255 panel setting.

Background density 0 to 255 panel setting.

Some codes do not have T or B.

*1: Be sure to press this key after printing starts.

(If this key is not pressed, the copier keeps printing)

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 23

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TEST PRINT (02) ITEMS

Code

Factor

Test pattern item

All-surface halftone (latter part)

Item to be confirmed

109 Electrical

110 Electrical

Error diffusion

All completely black at T=0.

Halftone density 0 to 255 panel setting

Scanning 256 levels (latter part)

All completely white at T=255.

The density should change

smoothly between black and white.

There should be 33 levels in a tran-

sition between black and white.

There should be 17 levels in a tran-

sition between black and white.

There should be 33 levels in a tran-

sition between black and white.

There should be 17 level in a transi-

tion between black and white.

111 Image processing Scanning 33 levels (latter part)

112 Electrical

Scanning 17 levels (latter part)

113 Image processing Feed 33 levels (latter part)

114 Electrical

115 Electrical

Feed 17 levels (latter part)

Scanning 1 dot line (latter part) 2-level

Character density 0 to 255 panel setting

Background density 0 to 255 panel setting

Scanning 24 dot line (latter part) 2-level

Character density 0 to 255 panel setting

Background density 0 to 255 panel setting

Black when both T and B are 0.

White when both T and B are 255.

116 Electrical

Black when both T and B are 0.

White when both T and B are 255.

121 Image processing All-surface halftone (foregoing part)

122 Image processing Scanning 256 levels (foregoing part)

Error diffusion

All completely gray.

The density should change

smoothly between black and white.

There should be 33 levels in a tran-

sition between black and white.

There should be 16 levels in a tran-

sition between black and white.

123 Image processing Scanning 33 levels (foregoing part)

124 Image processing Scanning 16 levels (foregoing part)

Error diffusion

135 Image processing All-surface horizontal 1 dot line, horizontal 1 dot space

136 Image processing All-surface vertical 1 dot line, vertical 1 dots pace

137 Image processing All-surface horizontal 2 dot line, horizontal 2 dot space

138 Image processing All-surface vertical 2 dot line, vertical 2 dot space

141 Image processing 1 dot grid pattern (10 mm pitch)

Grid of 10 by 10 mm square. The

line width increases as the code in-

creases (141→142→145→146).

Test 142 is used for 1.4 Adjustment.

142 Image processing 2 dot grid pattern (10 mm pitch)

145 Image processing Grid pattern of 4 sets of 1 dot line, horizontal 2 dots space

(10 mm pitch)

146 Image processing Grid pattern of 4 sets of 2 dot line, horizontal 2 dots space

(10 mm pitch)

149 Image processing A3 all completely black

150 Image processing A3 all white

All completely black

All completely white

151 Image processing Rightward rising slant line 1 dot (5 mm pitch)

The line interval in the main scan-

ning direction should be 5 mm. The

line should be straight.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 24

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) 03. MODEM TEST (Factory test)

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

(4) 04. SENSOR TEST

When the machine enters the SENSOR TEST Mode, the status of each sensor is indicated on the display.

The status can be checked by selecting the corresponding bit.

(For items to be checked, refer to the Sensor Test Items table.)

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

02.PRINT TEST

03.MODEM TEST

04.SENSOR TEST

SET

Select test menu

Display selection

Cancel

1 (A1)

BIT

7------0

01001010 00100010 00000001

01001110 00100000 00000001

00001010 00100110

11 (I8)

12 (S1)

01001010 00100010

01001110 00100000

01001110 00100000 00000001

00001010 00100110

20 (P5)

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 25

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Explanation of status display

Status display example

When the sensor test is carried out, the status

of each sensor is indicated on the display with

0 or 1.

IO3

IO6

IO1

IO4

IO7

IO2

IO5

IO8

Each signal is divided into 8-bit blocks.

The character on the left edge of the display

indicates as follows:

A: Signal input to ASIC

I: Signal input to the IO port

S: Signal from the scanner or R/ADF

P: Signal from the option connected to the

PFC

The display is switched using the or key.

Example 1:

Confirm whether the front cover is open or close.

The front cover is equipped with the 24-V ON/OFF

switch (Interlock switch) and the front cover switch.

The status of both switches is 1 when the cover is

open, and 0 when it is close.

IO3 Bit1

01001010 00100010 00000001

01001110 00100000 00000001

00001010 00100110

When the status of the one is 0 and that of the other

is 1 as shown in the example, there is something

wrong with either of these switches.

IO4 Bit2

Front cover

Open Close

IO3 bit 1 (Interlock switch)

IO4 bit 2 (Front cover switch)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 26

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2:

Confirm whether or not the optional memory PWA

is installed, with the status of bits 6 and 7 of IO1 on

the display.

Memory expansion slot on the back of the copier

As shown in the table below, bits 6 and 7 detect the

upper slot and lower slot, respectively.

The installation of the memory PWA can be con-

firmed with these bits.

Bit 6 (MEM1)

Bit 7 (MEM2)

Slot (upper)

Slot (lower)

PWA

Bit 7

Bit 6

Not inserted (upper and lower slots)

Inserted into the upper slot

Inserted into the lower slot

Inserted into both slots

(1: No PWA inserted / 0: PWA inserted)

IO1

Bit7

IO1

Bit6

The capacity of memory installed can be confirmed,

with bits 4 and 5 of IO1.

01001010 00100010 00000001

01001110 00100000 00000001

00001010 00100110

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 27

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENSOR TEST (04) ITEMS

Data

Bit

Input info.

Function

Fusing thermistor A/D value

Value

1 (A1)

A/D CH0 b7

A/D CH0 b6

A/D CH0 b5

A/D CH0 b4

A/D CH0 b3

A/D CH0 b2

A/D CH0 b1

A/D CH0 b0

A/D CH2 b7

A/D CH2 b6

A/D CH2 b5

A/D CH2 b4

A/D CH2 b3

A/D CH2 b2

A/D CH2 b1

A/D CH2 b0

A/D CH3 b7

A/D CH3 b6

A/D CH3 b5

A/D CH3 b4

A/D CH3 b3

A/D CH3 b2

A/D CH3 b1

A/D CH3 b0

MEM2DET

00H-FFH

The value for temperature data is expressed with 8 bits.

ASIC1

A/D

CH0

2 (A2)

Fusing side thermistor A/D value

The value for temperature data is expressed with 8 bits.

ASIC1

A/D

CH2

3 (A3)

Drum thermistor A/D value

The value for temperature data is expressed with 8 bits.

ASIC1

A/D

CH3

4 (IO1)

Option MEM2 connection signal

0: Connected

(PWA-F-MEM Optional memory PWA)

Option MEM1 connection signal

1: Not connected

I/O

MEM1DET

SDRAM2ID

SDRAM1ID

PCLSET

0: Connected

E0100C

(PWA-F-MEM Optional memory PWA)

Detection signal for MEM PWA2 256 M bit SDRAM

1: Not connected

0: 256 M bit

1: 64 M bit/128 M bit

Detection signal for MEM PWA1 256 M bit SDRAM

PCL PWA connection detection signal

0: 256 M bit

1: 64 M bit/128 M bit

0: Connected

1: Not connected

AU1SET

I-FAX PWA connection detection signal

0: Connected

1: Not connected

DRUM

Presence or absence detection of process unit

0: Without 1: With

FUSE

Detection of new or old process unit

0: Normal 1: New

5 (IO2)

I/O

E01006

Reserved

FAXDET

FAX PWA (GD-1061) connection signal

0: Connected

1: Not connected

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 28

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data

Bit

Input info.

Function

Value

6 (IO3)

Reserved

I/O

E01008

BUCS

Battery abnormal condition detection signal

0: Normal

1: Battery abnormal condition

0: No paper

FDS2ON

FDS1ON

EXT-SEN (Exit sensor)

1: Paper detected

0: Paper detected

1: No paper

FED-SEN (Feed sensor)

24VONOFF

COS1ON

IPCDET

Cover open (Interlock SW) detection

TC-SW (Toner cartridge switch)

0: Closed 1: Open

*1 0: With 1: Without

0: Connected

7 (IO4)

IPC PWA (Finisher) connection signal

1: Not connected

0: Connected

I/O

PCDET

PC-I/F PWA connection signal

E0100A

1: Not connected

5ROMSEL

RCVROM (MAIN recovery PWA) installation detection

0: RCVROM installed

1: Not installed

PSS3

CST-SW (Paper cassette switch)

FRCOV-SW (Front cover switch)

0: Closed 1: Open

*1 0: Closed 1: Open

FCOSON

PESON

PE-SEN (Paper empty sensor)

Cassette 1 0: Paper loaded

1: Paper empty

LPSON

T-UP-SEN (Tray-up sensor)

Cassette 1 0: Not lifted up 1: Lifted up

8 (IO5)

I/O

E02006

JCONECT

Connection of any of JSP or OCT

0: Connected

1: Not connected

Reserved

FSELECT

Connection of BRIDGE COVER

0: BRIDGE COVER connected

1: JSP or OCT

Reserved

9 (IO6)

TESTMON

TNRE-SEN (Toner empty sensor)

0: Toner empty

1: Toner detected

0: Synchronous

1: Asynchronous

0: OCT connected

I/O

PMSTS

Polygon motor synchronizing signal

Connection of OCT

E02008

JPASSW

JJAMSW

JCOSON

JPOSON

JFLS2ON

JFLS1ON

1: BRIDGE COVER or JSP

0: No paper 1: Paper present (JSP/OCT)

Jam detection/jam detection/middle jam detection

0: No paper

1: Paper present (BRIDGE COVER)

JSP cover open/OCT cover open/BRIDGE COVER cover 0: Cover closed

open

*2 1: Cover open

0:Nopaper 1: Paperdetected (JSP/OCT)

Paper in upper stacker/-/BRIDGE COVER exit jam

0: Paper detected

detection

1: No paper (BRIDGE COVER)

Upper stacker paper full/offset initial position/-

0: Normal/non-initial

*2 1: paper full/initial position

0: Normal 1: Paper full (JSP/OCT)

Lower stacker/paper full/paper full

*2 0: Paper full 1: Normal (BRIDGE COVER)

*1: The detection of the presence or absence of a toner cartridge is correctly displayed only when the front

cover is open.

*2: One of the three options is indicated (only one of them can be connect).

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 29

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data

Bit

Input info.

Function

Value

10 (IO7)

Reserved

I/O

E0200A

16MBDET

Pix SDRAM 16MB/32MB recognition signal

Reserved

0: 32 MB 1: 16 MB

MMSYNC

Main motor synchronization

0: Synchronous (constant speed)

1: Asynchronous

0: PCL 1: GDI

0: Connected

1: Not connected

0: Copy limited 1: Enable

0: Connected

1: Not connected

0: ON 1: OFF

0: Paper present

1: Paper empty

0: Not HP 1: HP

G/PCHK

Distinction between GDI and PCL

Counter connection signal

11 (IO8)

CTR-CNT

I/O

ENABLE

Enable signal

E50000

Low order

8 bits

MCONECT

SFB unit connection signal

MPSS3ON

MPSS2ON

MPSS1ON

MPSS0ON

MPESON

SFB paper size sensor 3 ON signal

SFB paper size sensor 2 ON signal

SFB paper size sensor 1 ON signal

SFB paper size sensor 0 ON signal

SET-SEN (SFB feed sensor)

12 (S1)

HOME-SEN (Home position sensor)

Reserved

Scanner sensor

status 1

Reserved

ADF: ADFCOV-SW (ADF top cover open switch)

RADF: JAM-SW (Jam access cover switch)

SIZE-SEN (Document length sensor)

0: Closed 1: Open

Upper 8 bits

0: No paper

1: Paper detected

0: Closed 1: Open

ADF: ADFOPN-SEN (ADF open sensor)

RADF: RADF-OPN-SNS (RADF open/close sensor)

ADF: EMPTY-SEN (Document empty sensor)

RADF: EMP-SNS (Empty sensor)

ORCOV-SEN (Original cover sensor)

Reserved

0: Paper empty

1: Paper detected

0: Closed 1: Open

13 (S2)

LENG-SNS (Original length sensor)

TRY-SNS (Tray sensor)

0: No paper 1: Paper present

Scanner sensor

status 1

READ-SNS (Read sensor)

Low order

8 bits

RVR-SNS (Reverse sensor)

ADF: REGST-SEN (ADF registration sensor)

RADF: REG-SNS (Registration sensor)

POS-SEN (ADF read sensor)

0: No paper 1: Paper present

ADF: HAISI-SEN (ADF exit sensor)

RADF: EXIT-SNS (Exit sensor)

14 (S3)

Reserved

APS-6 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

APS-5 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

APS-4 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

APS-3 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

APS-2 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

APS-1 (Automatic paper size detection sensor)

Reserved

0: No paper 1: Paper present

Scanner sensor

status 2

Upper order

8 bits

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 30

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data

Bit

Input info.

Function

Value

15 (S4)

Reserved

SIZE-SNS 3 (Original width sensor 3)

SIZE-SNS 2 (Original width sensor 2)

SIZE-SNS 1 (Original width sensor 1)

Reserved

0: No paper 1: Paper present

Scanner sensor

status 2

0: No paper 1: Paper present

Low order

8 bits

Reserved

16 (P1)

SIZPFU

2CST-SW (PFU Cassette switch)

Reserved

0: Installed 1: Not installed

PFC

Reserved

Input check 1

Reserved

PFUFD-SW

PFUCOV

PFUEMP

OCF-SEN (2nd feed sensor)

2COV-SW (PFU cover open switch)

2PE-SEN (PFU paper empty sensor)

0: No paper 1: Paper present

0: Closed 1: Open

0: Paper loaded

1: Paper empty

PFUUP

2T-UP-SEN (PFU tray-up sensor)

CST-U-SW (Upper cassette detection switch)

TRY-BTH-SNR (Tray bottom sensor)

Reserved

0: Not lifted up 1: Lifted up

17 (P2)

SIZCU

0: Installed 1: Not installed

LCTRBTM

0: Other 1: Lower limit

PFC

Input check 2

CFENCL0

PR-MST-SS (Standby side paper mis-staking sensor)

Reserved

0: OFF 1: Closed

SIZLC

Cassette detection switch (LCF)

FED-U-SNR (Upper feed sensor)

Reserved

0: Installed 1: Not installed

FEDU

0: No paper 1: Paper loaded

Reserved

COV-SW

SIDE-COV-SW (Side cover open/close switch)

Reserved

0: Closed 1: Open

PEMPU

EMP-U-SNR (Upper cassette paper empty sensor)

Reserved

0: Paper loaded 1: No paper

TUPU

TOP-U-SNR (Upper cassette tray-up sensor)

PST-SNR-FS (Feeding side paper stock sensor)

LST-L-SW (Lower cassette detection switch)

EMD-F-HP-SNR (End fence home position sensor)

Reserved

0: Not lifted up 1: Lifted up

18 (P3)

SIZCL

LMTBCKF

0: Installed 1: Not installed

0: Other 1: Fence back limit

PFC

Input check 3

LMTFWDK

END-F-STP-SNR (End fence stop position sensor)

Reserved

0: OFF 1: Fence forward limit

LCEMPFD

FEDL

EMP-SNR-SS (Standby side empty sensor)

FED-L-SNR (Lower feed sensor)

Side cover open/close switch (LCF)

PLL lock signal

0: OFF 1: Open

0: No paper 1: Paper loaded

0: Open 1: Closed

0: Stable 1: Other

0: Operating 1: Motor stopped

LCSIDCOV

PLL-OK

LCMOTLD

LCF transport motor

Reserved

LCTRTOP

PEMPL

LCRLYSW

TUPL

TOP-SNR (Tray-up sensor)

0: Other 1: Upper limit

0: Paper loaded 1: No paper

0: Paper detected 1: No paper

0: Not lifted up 1: Lifted up

0: No paper 1: Paper present

EMP-L-SNR (Lower cassette paper empty sensor)

FED-SNR (Feed sensor)

TOP-L-SNR (Lower cassette tray-up sensor)

EMP-SNR-FS (Feeding side empty sensor)

LCEMP

*1: The upper value for each bit indicates the function assumed when the PFP is installed, and the lower value

the function assumed when the LCF is installed.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 31

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data

Bit

Input info.

Function

Value

0: Connected

19 (P4)

PFU connection signal

1: Not connected

PFC

Reserved

Input check 4

ADUCOV-SW (ADU cover open switch)

FED2-SEN (ADU paper jam sensor (Upper))

FED1-SEN (ADU paper jam sensor (Lower))

Reserved

0: Closed 1: Open

0: No paper 1: Paper present

20 (P5)

EXIT-SW

EXT-SEN (Exit sensor)

0: No paper 1: Paper present

0: Paper present

1: No paper

PSTP-1

FED-SEN (Feed sensor)

PFC

Input check 5

24VCHK

ADCNT

24V down signal

0: Down 1: Normal

0: Connected

1: Not connected

ADU connection signal

Reserved

LCFCNT

LCF connection signal

0: Connected

1: Not connected

Reserved

PFPCNT

PFP connection signal

0: Connected

1: Not connected

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 32

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5) 05. SRAM TEST

The read/write test is performed throughout the image memory. The test checks the whole SRAM. When

an error is found, the address of the erroneous portion is displayed and the test is stopped.

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

03.MODEM TEST

04.SENSOR TEST

05.SRAM TEST

Select test menu

05.SRAM TEST

SET

SRAM TEST

TESTING

Cancel

SRAM TEST

ADDRESS=

BFA106H

(6) 06. DRAM TEST

The read/write test is performed on the DRAM (including page memory and image memory). When an

error is found, the address of the erroneous portion is displayed and the test is stopped.

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

04.SENSOR TEST

05.SRAM TEST

06.DRAM TEST

Select test menu

06.DRAM TEST

SET

DRAM TEST

TESTING

Cancel

DRAM TEST

ADDRESS=

FFE201H

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 33

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(7) 07. CLOCK IC TEST

After programming the fixed data and time on the clock IC, the test reads the programmed data and time

and checks whether or not they are correct

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

05.SRAM TEST

06.DRAM TEST

07.CLOCK IC TEST

Select test menu

07.CLOCK IC TEST

SET

CLOCK IC TEST

Cancel

CLOCK IC TEST

(8) 08. SCANNER TEST

The read/write test is performed on the RAM built in the image processing LSI.

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

06.DRAM TEST

07.CLOCK IC TEST

08.SCANNER TEST

Select test menu

08.SCANNER TEST

SET

SCANNER TEST

Cancel

SCANNER TEST

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 34

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(9) 09. CODEC TEST

The test encodes data of 10 lines using the MH coding, decodes it and compares it with the original data.

Power ON

FUNCTION TEST

07.CLOCK IC TEST

08.SCANNER TEST

09.CODEC TEST

Select test menu

09.CODEC TEST

SET

CODEC TEST

Cancel

CODEC TEST

(10) 10. OUTPUT TEST

This test checks the operation of the motor, clutch and fan separately.

This test can check the operations of two or more parts at the same time. For example, the motor is tuned

on while the clutch is on.

FUNCTION TEST

Power ON

08.SCANNER TEST

09.CODEC TEST

10.OUTPUT TEST

SET

Select test menu

Cancel

OUTPUT TEST

101

Enter test mode

Digital Keys

SET

Test code

OUTPUT TEST

C=101

OFF

Test start

START

Turn on or off by pressing

START or C/S, respectively.

Test stop

C/S

Cancel

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 35

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OUTPUT TEST (10) ITEMS

Code

Compo.

Operation

Note

101

102

103

105

106

108

109

201

202

203

204

205

206

222

223

224

225

226

227

242

243

250

251

255

Copier

PFC

Main motor ON (discharge also ON)/OFF

Toner motor ON/OFF

Polygon motor ON ( 600 DPI)/OFF

Polygon motor ON ( 16*15.4)/OFF

Polygon motor ON ( 15.4*16)/OFF

Registration roller clutch ON/OFF

PFP main motor ON/OFF

Copier

PFC

Pickup clutch ON/OFF

PFU pickup clutch ON/OFF

PFC

2nd feed clutch ON/OFF

Copier

PFC

Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF

LCF feed clutch

PFC

LCF transport clutch

PFC

ADU motor (Lower) ON/OFF

ADU motor (Upper) forward ON/OFF

ADU motor (Upper) reverse ON/OFF

PFP transfer clutch ON/OFF

Cassette 3 feed clutch ON/OFF

Cassette 4 feed clutch ON/OFF

Cassette 1 tray-up motor ON

Cassette 2 tary-up motor ON

Developer bias transformer ON/OFF

Charging ON/OFF

PFC

Copier

PFC

Copier

Transfer guide bias ON/OFF (Do it after having done ON

of the output of Code 250)

256

261

263

268

269

270

271

275

276

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

296

297

298

Copier

Scanner

PFC

Laser ON/OFF

Scanner carriage motor ON (automatic stop at limit)

Exposure lamp ON/OFF

LCF end fence motor ON (right and left)

LCF end fence solenoid ON/OFF

LCF transport motor ON/OFF

LCF tray-up motor up/down

PFC

Cassette 3 tary-up motor ON

Cassette 4 tary-up motor ON

PFC

RADF

ADF

RADF pick-up roller rotation ON/OFF

RADF registration roller rotation ON/OFF

RADF read roller CW rotation ON/OFF

RADF read roller CCW rotation ON/OFF

RADF reverse roller CW rotation ON/OFF

RADF reverse roller CCW rotation ON/OFF

RADF document reverse solenoid ON/OFF

RADF exit solenoid ON/OFF

(F MOT)

(RDMOT)

(RVMOT)

ADF transport motor forward ON/OFF

ADF transport motor reverse ON/OFF

RADF fan motor ON/OFF

ADF

RADF

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 36

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code

Compo.

Operation

Note

302

303

304

308

Copier

Transfer DC-ON-HIGH (05-220 value used)

Transfer DC-ON-CENTER (05-221 value used)

Transfer DC-ON-LOW (05-222 value used)

Separation-ON-HIGH

(05-233 value used, developer bias also output)

Separation-ON-CENTER

309

310

330

331

Copier

(05-234 value used, developer bias also output)

Separation-ON-LOW

(05-235 value used, developer bias also output)

Process unit fan motor : H (High speed rotation), and

vacuum fan motor rotation

Process unit fan motor : L (Low speed rotation), and

vacuum fan motor rotation

333

334

Copier

JOB separator/FIN pass solenoid ON/OFF

Offset tray Stack front/rear (OCT motor ON/OFF)

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 37

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(11) PRINTER BOARD TEST

The test checks whether or not the printer board operates normally, by exchanging simple commands

with the printer board.

FUNCTION TEST

Power ON

09.CODEC TEST

10.OUTPUT TEST

11.PRINTER BOARD TEST

Select PRINTER BOARD TEST

Use or keys

PRINTER BOARD TEST

TESTING

SET

End of test

Cancel

PRINTER BOARD TEST

1.2.5 MAINTENANCE

(1) MEMORY CLEAR

There are two ways to perform memory clear; the power on while pressing the specified keys, and

partial memory clear by selecting items to be cleared from the menu.

Operation Procedure

a) Memory clear at the startup

Please wait

Specified keys Power ON

Warming up

READY

READY (Standby)

PAPER: A4

:AUTO

ZOOM:100%

EDIT

*1 : Continue pushing the key until “Please wait” message is displayed.

Moreover, do not turn off the power supply.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 38

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b) Item selection from menu

PROGRAM

When READY is displayed

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

Enter SERVICE MODE

***SERVICE MODE***

03.INITIAL SETUP

04.MENU MAP

Use or keys

Select TEST MODE

SET

05.TEST MODE

TEST MODE

Use or keys

Select MAINTENANCE

03.PRINT TEST RESULT

04.FUNCTION TEST

05.MAINTENANCE

SET

MAINTENANCE

01.MEMORY CLEAR

02.SET FUNCTION

03.MEMORY WRITE

Use or keys

Select MEMORY CLEAR

SET

MEMORY CLEAR

01.PIX MEMORY

02.EXCEPT USER MEMORY

03.ALL

Select menu

SET

Use or keys

04.USER AREA

After

approx. 2

seconds

PIX MEMORY

Memory is cleared.

Memory clear accepted

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 39

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RAM clear table

Service parameter setting

Error data

RAM data

Country/

Region

setting

Service

Drum

data

FUNC/

SYSFUNC/

UAD etc.

Service

Journal

setting data report

([0][8]) area data

Protocol Counter

adjustment

data ([0][5])

area

on FAX

communi-

cation

trace

data

*a)

RAM clear mode

*b)

Set default

value

Set default

[1] [3] [*] and turn ON *2) *3)

Clear

value *e)

[1] [3] [#] and turn ON

[*] [#] and turn ON

*2)

Clear

[START] [STOP] and

turn ON

Set default

value

Set default

value *e)

*2)

*1)

[0] [8] and turn ON, then

[6] [6] [5]

Set default Set default

value

Set default

value

Set default

value *e)

[0] [2] and turn ON

1. PIX MEMORY

Changeable

Clear

Set default

value

2. EXCEPT USER MEMORY

3. ALL *3)

Clear

Set default

value

Set default

value *e)

Clear

(Same as “[1] [3] [*] and turn ON”)

4. USER AREA

*3)

*1) In case of replacing the main board in the field, you can initializes the parameters

related to copy function stored on the board using this function.

Therefore when this function is performed, it is necessary to readjust the follow-

ing items.

1) Adjustment of paper aligning value

2) Printer unit adjustment

3) Scanner unit adjustment

4) ADF/RADF installation setting

*2) When RAM clear is performed, no message is indicated on the LCD.

Once RAM clear has been completed, “Please wait” appears on the LCD.

*3) RAM clear may take more than 10 seconds. Note that the error (Broken Regis-

tration) results if the power is turned off during RAM clear.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 40

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User parameter setting

Secure

receive

data

Pending

FAX job

data

Dial data One touch Department

Station

name

number

Passward

*d)

Stored

JOB data

*c)

data

code data

Clear

*a) Total Scan, Print jam, Job counter, Counter for each paper size

*b) Total Print, Drum counter, Toner counter, etc.

*c) One touch, Speed, Group etc.

*d) Polling Password, Remote Access Code

*e) 08-446, 08-447 not cleared

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 41

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) SET FUNCTION

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

(3) MEMORY WRITE

You can refer to and change the data stored at each address in the SRAM and DRAM.

ADDRESS and DATA input it with hex data.

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

Enter SERVICE MODE

***SERVICE MODE***

03.INITIAL SETUP

04.MENU MAP

Use or keys

Select TEST MODE

SET

05.TEST MODE

TEST MODE

Select MAINTENANCE Use or keys

SET

04.FUNCTION TEST

05.MAINTENANCE

06.SERVICE LIST

MAINTENANCE

Use or keys

Select MEMORY WRITE

01.MEMORY CLEAR

02.SET FUNCTION

03.MEMORY WRITE

CANCEL

SET

MEMORY WRITE

ADDRESS =

Input ADDRESS

Hex data entry method

A: * and 0

B: * and 1

C: * and 2

D: * and 3

E: * and 4

F: * and 5

SET

Input DATA

MEMORY WRITE

ADDRESS=

DATA=

XXXXXX

SET

(4) ERROR COUNTER SHIFT

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

(5) PIX MEMORY TRANSFER

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 42

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.6 SERVICE LIST

This function allows you to print lists. There are six kinds of lists that can be printed.

•

PROTOCOL TRACE *1

TOTAL ERRORS *1

FUNCTION (FUNC 05, 08 List)

DRUM HISTORY

FUNCTION (Jam counter, ROM ver.)

*1:

To be printed when the FAX Kit (GD-1061) is installed.

PROGRAM

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

Enter SERVICE MODE

Use or keys

Select TEST MODE

SET

***SERVICE MODE***

03.INITIAL SETUP

04.MENU MAP

05.TEST MODE

TEST MODE

Select SERVICE LIST

SET

04.FUNCTION TEST

05.MAINTENANCE

06.SERVICE LIST

Select list to be printed

SERVICE LIST

01.PROTOCOL TRACE

02.TOTAL ERROR

03.FUNCTION

SET

04.DRUM HISTORY

05.MEMORY DUMP

Print list

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 43

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(1) PROTOCOL TRACE

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

(2) TOTAL ERRORS

Refer to the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

(3) FUNCTION (FUNC, 05, 08 List)

This list is printed out with a title of SETTING REPORT FOR MAINTENANCE. It prints a list of present

function settings.

Print Items

• 1st Sheet

COUNTRY/REGION

FUNC 0 to 39

PC FUNC 0 to 7

HOME 0 to 2

Country/Region code

Prints the settings at this point of time in binary format.

↓

UAD 0 to 19

EX TYPE 1

ACC DGT 1 to 2

• 2nd Sheet

05 xxx

Prints the set values at this point of time.

08 xxx

↓

(xxx is code number.)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 44

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(4) DRUM HISTORY

This list is for checking the use status of the drum. It provides a list of information on the drum being

used and the previous drum.

Print Items

• CURRENT COUNTER : Current information

• TOTAL PRINT

• DRUM COUNTER

• A4/LT or A3/LD

• HISTORY

: Current total print count

: Current drum counter value (= Print count x10)

: Current print count by paper size

: History of replacing the drum (counter clear)

: Date when the drum is replaced (counter clear)

: Counter value at the time when the drum is replaced

: Print count by paper size at the time when the drum is replaced

• DATE

• DRUM COUNTER

• A4/LT or A3/LD

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 45

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5) MEMORY DUMP LIST

A list of dumped RAM data is printed. Designate a start address (6-digit) and size (4-digit) and press

SET for printing.

Print Data

ADDRESS

HEX

Memory dump start address. The last digit is always “0.” *1

The data in memory is printed in hexadecimal. The last digit is always “0.” *2

Data obtained by converting the data in memory into ASCII code.

ASCII

Notes: *1: The last digit is discarded when other than “0.”

*2: The last digit is rounded up when other than “0.”

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 46

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(6) FUNCTION (Jam counter ROM ver.)

Press the PROGRAM key and enter the SERVICE mode. Then, select LISTS and print a function list

so that the user set information will be printed on the first sheet, and the jam counter on the second

sheet.

The same data as printed in (3) is printed on the third and fourth sheets.

PROGRAM

01.DEFAURT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

Enter SERVICE MODE

Use or keys

***SERVICE MODE***

01.DEFAULT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

Select LISTS

SET

03.INITIAL SETUP

LISTS

1.DEPERTMENT CODE

2.FUNCTION

Select FUNCTION

SET

Use or keys

Print list

FUNCTION

Printing accepted

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 47

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Data

JAM COUNTER

Jam information

DOCUMENT

PAPER JAM

TYPE1 JAM

TYPE2 JAM

TYPE3 JAM

TYPE4 JAM

TYPE5 JAM

TYPE6 JAM

TYPE7 JAM

Jammed original count

Total count of TYPE1 to 7

Total count of E13

Total count of E01

Total count of E02

Total count of E11, E12, E14, E15, E16, E19

Total count of E08, E31 to E36

Total count of E03, E09, E41, E42, E43, E45

Total count of EA1 to EA7, EAF

* Exx: Refer to the 1.1 Error Code List

FLASH ROM

PROGRAM

FUNCTION

LANGUAGE

SCANNER

Version information

Program version and creation date

Function version and creation date

Language version and creation date

Scanner version and creation date

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 48

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.7 Country/Region code

Setting for country or region.

Input code according to a table.

Model

NAD

Code

Paper type

LT series

A4 series

ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/MJD

Important: When FAX kit (GD-1061) is not installed, do not input code except 1 or 44.

Power ON

COUNTRY/REGION=

Code No

Cancel

( F/C used to correct value)

COUNTRY/REGION=

Please wait

SET

C/S

START

Warming up

Note: When FAX kit (GD-1061) is installed, refer to a service handbook (GD-1061).

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 49

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.8 Scanner parking mode

TEST MODE PA

Power ON

Carriage moved to the left edge

Power OFF

(To enable packing screws to be refitted in the

scanner unit.)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 50

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.9 Speaker volume

Adjust the volume of the alarm and key touch tones.

PROGRAM

Press the PROGRAM key

PROGRAM

01.DEFAULT SETTINGS

02.LISTS

03.INITIAL SETUP

Select DEFAULT SETTING

Use or keys

DEFAULT SETTING

01.MACHINE DEFAULT

02.COPY SETUP

SET

03.FAX SETUP

Select MACHINE DEFAULT

Use or keys

MACHINE DEFAULT

03.TIMERS

04.WEEKLY TIMER

05.SPEAKER VOLUME

SET

Select SPEAKER VOLUME Use or keys

SET

SPEAKER VOLUME

1.ALARM VOLUME

2.KEY TUCH VOLUME

3.RINGER VOLUME

Use or keys

Select ALARM VOLUME

ALARM VOLUME

VOLUME:

SET

Use or keys

Adjust the volume

SET

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 51

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.2.10 Adjustment of document width sensor

Code 05-380, 381 adjustment procedure.

Power ON

Adjust the document guide to the narrowest.

(Fig. 1-2-10-1)

1-2-10-1

Enter code

Fig. 1-2-10-1

SET

CANCEL

Adjust the document guide to the widest.

(Fig. 1-2-10-2)

1-2-10-2

Enter code

Fig. 1-2-10-2

SET

Power OFF

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 52

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.3 Image Quality Control

If the user wants to change the image density, adjust the image density in adjust mode "05."

Original mode

Adjustment item

Remarks

Photo/Text

Photo

Text

503

505

508

514

501

504

Standard PPC Manual density

center value

The larger the value, the darker

the image

506

509

512

507

510

515

Light side

Manual density

The larger the value, the lighter

the light range

Code

Dark side

Manual density

The larger the value, the darker

the dark range

Standard PPC Automatic density The larger the value, the darker

the image

Follow the procedure below to adjust the image density to suit the user’s preferences while comparing the

image obtained in the test copy and the currently entered allowable values.

Digital Keys

(Code)

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Set the value)

(Test print)

START

Notes: 1. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

2. Default values are as following.

Code

501

503

504

505

506

507

508

509

510

512

514

515

Default value

139

133

130

140

133

130

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 53

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4 Copy Image Dimension Adjustment

As for the print image adjustment, the adjustment items are listed below.

The adjustment should be performed in the following order.

Adjustment item

Code

(1) Aligning value

(450) - (453) (455) - (458) (463) (465)

(2) Printer unit adjustment 1

a) Primary scanning reproduction ratio

Polygonal motor 600 dpi

(400)

(410) (417) (418) (419) (497)

(421)

b) Primary scanning position

Laser starting position 600 dpi

c) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio

Main motor speed fine adjustment

d) Secondary scanning position

Registration

(440) (441) - (445)

(3) Scanner unit adjustment

a) Primary scanning position

CCD primary scanning deviation

b) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio

Scanner secondary scanning reproduction ratio

c) Secondary scanning position

Scanner secondary scanning deviation

d) Top margin

(306)

(304)

(305)

(430)

(431)

(432)

(433)

e) Left margin

f) Right margin

g) Bottom margin

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 54

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.1 Adjustment of paper aligning value

<Procedure> (Use code 450 - 453, 455, 456, 457, 458, 463, 465 in the "05" mode.)

Cassette 1

(Long)

Cassette 1

(Short)

Cassette 2

(Long)

Cassette 2

(Short)

If necessary

450

451

452

453

PFP

(Short)

Bypass

(Short)

PFP

(Long)

Bypass

(Long)

LCF

457

ADU

455

456

458

463

465

(1)

Digital Keys

(Code)

SET

Digital Keys

(Set the value)

SET

INT

START

(Test copy)

INT

Power ON

START

(2) Check the copy for image void and if there is

any, reduce the new value to "31" "30"

"29"... until no void occurs. Check for paper

misfeeding.

When the aligning value is increased, noise

caused by the paper scraping against the Mylar

may possibly be increased.

Void

01-04-02

(3) For the LCF, ADU and bypass, the same pro-

cedure can be used.

Notes: 1. When frequent paper jams occur near the aligning roller caused by using special thin paper

other than that specified, the aligning value can be changed (reduced) as a measure. However,

when the aligning value is reduced excessively, this may possibly cause the registration to be

shifted. Therefore, make sure that no registration shifting occurs while adjusting the value.

2. Long size adjustment is used as the base when there are both long and short adjustments.

3. Adjusts the code only for option attached.

* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the

aligning amount.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 55

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.2 Printer unit adjustment

a) Polygonal motor 600 dpi (Primary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer unit)

(1) Set 0 for codes 430 to 433 of the margin setup in 05: Adjustment mode.

(2) Make a test print and adjustment as in the following procedure.

INTERRUPT

PROGRAM

05:TEST MODE

SET

Power ON

Enter SERVICE MODE

After 3 sec.

02:PRINT TEST

SET

1 4 2

(Code)

04:FUNCTION TEST

SET

START

C/S

Power OFF

(Cassette)

(Print end)

4 0 0

(Code)

MAIN MENU

INTERRUPT

SET

Digital Keys

SET

(Set the value)

START

(3) Measure the distance "A" which is the distance between the 5th line and 15th line from the left side of

the test print paper against the direction of the paper movement.

Print movement direction

01-04-03

(4) In order to set the distance "A" to 100 mm.

Notes: 1. A decrease in the value lengthen the distance "A". (0.2 % step)

2. Adjustment value is effective within the range of 108 - 148.

The default adjustment value is 128.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 56

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b) Laser starting position 600 dpi/PPC

(1) Make a test print and adjustment as in the following procedure.

INTERRUPT

PROGRAM

05:TEST MODE

SET

Power ON

Enter SERVICE MODE

After 3 sec.

02:PRINT TEST

SET

1 4 2

(Code)

04:FUNCTION TEST

SET

Digital Keys

(Cassette)

SET

START

C/S

Power OFF

(Print end)

Digital Keys

(Code)

MAIN MENU

INTERRUPT

SET

Digital Keys

SET

(Set the value)

START

(2) Measure the distance "B" which is the distance from the left side of the test print paper to the 6th line.

Print movement direction

01-04-04

(3) In order to set the distance "B" to 50 mm.

Notes: 1. An increase in the value makes the distance B longer.

2. The adjustment is made for each paper cassette. Paper cassette selection values (1) and cor-

responding codes (3) in paper cassette adjustment.

3. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

Paper cassette

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3/LCF

Cassette 4

Bypass

Cassette selection value

Code

410

417

418

419

497

Default

108

Step

106

119

0.043 mm

128

101

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 57

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c) Main motor speed fine adjustment (Secondary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer unit)

(1) Make a test print and adjustment as in the following procedure.

INTERRUPT

PROGRAM

05:TEST MODE

SET

Power ON

Enter SERVICE MODE

After 3 sec.

02:PRINT TEST

SET

1 4 2

(Code)

04:FUNCTION TEST

SET

START

C/S

Power OFF

(Cassette)

(Print end)

4 2 1

(Code)

MAIN MENU

INTERRUPT

SET

Digital Keys

SET

(Set the value)

START

(2) Measure the distance "C" which is the distance between the 5th line and 15th line from the leading

edge of the test print paper.

Print movement direction

01-04-05

(3) In order to set the distance "C" to 100 mm.

Notes: 1. A decrease in the value lengthen the distance "C" (0.1 %/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 78 - 178.

The default adjustment value is 124.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 58

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d) Registration

< Adjustment order >

ADU

445

LCF

443

Cassette 1

440

Bypass

442

Cassette 3/4

444

Cassette 2

441

Adjust the installed option units.

01-04-06

< Adjustment procedure >

(1) Make a test print and adjustment as in the following procedure.

INTERRUPT

PROGRAM

05:TEST MODE

SET

Power ON

Enter SERVICE MODE

After 3 sec.

02:PRINT TEST

SET

1 4 2

04:FUNCTION TEST

SET

(Code)

Digital Keys

SET

C/S

Power OFF

START

(Cassette)

(Print end)

Digital Keys

(Code)

MAIN MENU

INTERRUPT

SET

Digital Keys

SET

(Set the value)

START

(2) Measure the distance "D" which is the distance to the 6th line from the leading edge of the test print

paper.

Print movement direction

01-04-07

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 59

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) In order to set the distance "D" to 50 mm.

Notes: 1. An increase in the value increases the distance "D" (0.4 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 15. Default adjustment value is 8.

In case of the cassette 1 feeding (Code "440"), adjustment value is within the range of 0 - 40

(Default adjustment value is 23).

3. Since the cassette 1 adjustment value becomes a standard for all adjustments, this adjustment

must always be performed in the order stated above.

4. The adjustment is made for each paper cassette. Paper cassette selection values (1) and cor-

responding codes (3) in paper cassette adjustment.

Paper cassette Cassette selection value

Code

440

441

444

442

443

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3/4

Bypass

3/4

LCF

5. To confirm the adjustment of ADU (code 445), do not print a test print in the procedure in (1),

but copy the TEST CHART.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 60

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.3 Scanner unit adjustment

a) CCD primary scanning deviation

(1) Place the scale (its end to the rear side original scale and its side to the left side original scale) on the

original glass and make an A4/LT 100% copy.

Copy movement direction

01-04-08

(2) In order to correct the distance "E", which should be 100 mm from the position copied to the bottom

of the paper, adjust as follows.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value makes the image shift to the paper edge (0.04233 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 5 - 251.

The default adjustment value is 128.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 61

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio

(1) Place the scale (horizontal to the copy movement direction) and make an A3/LD 100% copy.

Copied scale

Copy movement direction

01-04-09

Actual scale

(2) Compare the copy and the scale.

(3) In order to adjust the divisions of the scale, do as follows.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the division of scale (0.1 %/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

The default adjustment value is 128.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 62

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c) Scanner secondary scanning deviation

(1) Set 0 for the top margin adjustment value.

SET

Power OFF

SET

Power ON

(Code)

START

(2) Place the scale (its end to the left side original scale) on the original glass and make an A3/LD 200%

copy.

Copy movement direction

01-04-10

(3) In order to correct the distance "F", which should be 20 0.5 mm from the leading edge of the paper,

adjust as follows.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value makes the image move to the trailing edge (0.126 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of "120 - 136".

The default adjustment value is 128.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 63

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d) Top margin

(1) While the original cover remains open, make an A4/LT 100% copy.

Copy movement direction

3.0 1.0 mm

01-04-11

(2) To establish a 3.0 1.0 mm blank space on the leading edge of the copy, adjust using the following

procedure.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the blank image (0.7 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 30.

The default adjustment value is 0.

e) Left margin

(1) While the original cover remains open, make an A4/LT 100% copy.

Copy movement direction

01-04-13

2.0 0.5 mm

(2) To establish a 2.0 0.5 mm blank space on the left side of the copy, adjust using the following

procedure.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the blank image (0.1 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

The default adjustment value is 0.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 64

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f) Right margin

(1) While the original cover remains open, make an A4/LT-100% copy.

Copy movement direction

2.0 0.5 mm

01-04-12

(2) To establish a 2.0 0.5 mm blank space on the right side of the copy, adjust using the following

procedure.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the blank image (0.1 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

The default adjustment value is 0.

g) Bottom margin

(1) While the original cover remains open, make an A4/LT-100% copy.

Copy movement direction

01-04-14

3.0 1.0 mm

(2) To establish a 3.0 1.0 mm blank space on the trailing edge of the copy, adjust using the following

procedure.

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Code)

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the blank image (0.1 mm/step).

2. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 255.

The default adjustment value is 0.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 65

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.5 Sharpness (HPF) Adjustment

If the user wants to change the image sharpness to softer or harder, adjust the HPF intensity in adjust

mode "05".

Image mode

Adjustment item

HPF intensity

Remarks

Photo/Text

Photo

Text

No. of units: HPF table number

0: Use of default value

1: Text/Photo mode

620

621

622

Code

2: Photo mode

3: Text mode

4-9: Unused

No. of tens: Filter combination intensity

0: Use of default value

1-9: Filter combination intensity

(The larger the intensity co-

efficient the stronger the in-

tensity.)

Digital Keys

(Enter code)

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Notes: 1. Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0-99.

2. Default value.

Code Default value

620

621

622

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 66

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.6 Gamma Slope Correction

If the user wants to change the gamma curve, adjust the gamma slope correction in adjust mode "05."

Image mode

Adjustment item

Remarks

Photo/Text

Photo

Text

593

594

595

Gamma slope correction If the value is increased, the image is

darkened.

Code

(Default value is 0)

Digital Keys

(Enter code)

SET

Digital Keys

SET

INT

START

INT

Power OFF

Power ON

(Set the value)

(Test copy)

START

Note: Adjustment value is able to be input within the range of 0 - 9.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 67

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.7 High-Voltage Adjustment

The developer bias, main charger, transfer charger and separation charger outputs must be

adjusted when the high-voltage power supply unit is replaced.

1.7.1 Adjustment

(1) Measurement

Developer Bias

Not use

Main Charger

Transfer Charger Separation Charger

(On the drum) (On the drum)

Process Unit

Measuring jig

Remove from the copier. (Not use)

Mount on the machine

Note1: Connect the green cable of the measuring to ground

on the copier.

Digital Tester (+) terminal

(-) terminal

Connect to the bias Connect to the

measuring plate main charger

Connect to the red cable of measuring

jig.

(B) of the machine. cable.

Connect to frame

ground (A).

Connect to the white cable of measuring jig.

(Frame grounding)

Function switch

Full scale

Remarks

1,000 V

Use a digital tester having an input resistance of 10MΩ or more.

Use the door switch jigs.

How to turn the power ON

Developer Bias

Main Charger

Transfer Charger Separation Charger

(On the drum) (On the drum)

(A) (Frame grounding)

Machine frame

(Frame grounding)

Green cable

Main charger cable

01-07-02

(B)

terminal

White cable

01-07-04

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

1 - 68

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

High-Voltage measurement jig

Main charger

cable

White cable

Red cable

Green cable

01-07-01

Door switch jigs

Door switch jig

(Large)

Door switch jig

(Small)

01-07-07

Green cable

Machine frame

(Frame grounding)

terminal

Red cable

White cable

01-07-05

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 69

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) Operation

Note

When adjusting the high-voltage output, a measuring jig is required. (except the developer

bias measurement.)

Connect the digital testers as instructed in (1) and follow the procedure below to adjust the developer bias,

main charger, transfer, separation output.

ADJUST MODE

MC =

Power ON

Digital Keys : Enter code

ADJUST MODE

MC = XXX

SET

: code No.

START

: Current entried adjustment value

DT =

YYY

: Adjust value "YYY" so that the measurement values satisfy the values in

the following table.

Digital Keys

Developer

Bias

Main

Charger

210

Transfer Charger (On the drum)

High

220

Center

221

205

Code

e-STUDIO160

series

-430 5V -637 5V

1098mV

146mV

1179mV

193mV

Measurement

value

1372mV

191mV

e-STUDIO200/ -460 5V -674 5V

250 series

Separation Charger (On the drum)

High

233

Center

234

Low

235

Code

Measurement e-STUDIO160

-553mV

-425mV

-300mV

value

series

e-STUDIO200/

250 series

101mV

51mV

SET

: Value "YYY" after adjustment is stored to SRAM.

: Return to other adjustment mode.

START

CANCEL

Power OFF

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

1 - 70

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.7.2 Precautions

(1) Developer bias

Caution during Adjustment

If fogging appears over the entire surface even though the grid voltage are appropriate, adjust the

developer bias on the control panel. The following defects may occur if the developer bias is

lowered too much:

• Image contrast becomes low.

• Image is patchy or blurred.

• Developer carrier adheres to the photosensitive body, making it easier for scratches to occur or

the surface of photosensitive body by the cleaner blade.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 71

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) Transfer

Items to Check before Adjustment

Pockmarks or defective transfer also occur in defects besides transfer output adjustment defects.

If this happens, check the following items. If an error is not found after carrying out the following

checks, adjust the output.

• Is the charger wire out of position or dirty? Are the transfer guide and roller deformed?

• Are the developer magnetic brushes contacting with the drum?

Is the process unit rotating during copying? Is the toner low?

• Is the copy paper bending as it is being fed in? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?

• Is the aligning roller rotating normally?

• Is the separation output deviating from the set value?

• Is the developer bias an appropriate value?

• Is the transfer/separation charger case earthed? Is the photosensitive drum (shaft) earthed? Is

the transfer/separation transformer earthed?

Caution during Adjustment

When pockmarks occur:

• If pockmarks are occurring in halftone areas, lower the transfer output value. However, note

that if the transfer output value is lowered too far, the transfer performance also will be re-

duced.

When defective transfer occurs:

Increase the transfer output value under the following conditions. However, note that if the

transfer output value is raised too far, pockmarks will occur.

• If defective transfer occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty.

• If thick paper is frequently used.

The adjustment code varies according to where pockmarks occur. Select the required adjust-

ment code while referring to the following diagram.

Approx. 11 mm

"220"

"221"

Adjustment code

Copy leading edge

Copy trailing edge

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

1 - 72

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) Separation

Items to Check before Adjustment

Defective separation from the drum also occurs in other than separation output adjustment de-

fects. If this happens, check the following items. If an error is not found after carrying out the

following checks, adjust the output.

• Is the charger wire out of position or dirty?

• Are the developer magnetic brushes contacting with the drum?

Is the process unit rotating during copying? Is the toner low?

• Is the copy paper bending as it is being fed in? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?

• Is the alignment roller rotating normally?

• Is the main charger outputting?

• Is the transfer output deviating from the set value?

• Is the transfer/separation charger case earthed? Is the transfer/separation transformer earthed?

Caution during Adjustment

When defective separation occurs:

Increase the separation output value under the following conditions. However, note that if the

separation output value is raised too far, pockmarks will occur, and separation performance

will be reduced. (Adjustment code = 233)

• If defective separation occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty.

• If thin paper is frequently used.

When defective transfer occurs:

• Lower the separation output value when defective transfer occurs. However, note that if the

separation output value is lowered too far, the separation performance also will be reduced.

The adjustment code varies according to where the defective transfer occurs. Select the

required adjustment code while referring to the following diagram.

Approx. 11mm

"233"

Approx. 20 mm

"235"

Approx. 45 mm

"235"

"234"

Adjustment code

Copy leading edge

Copy trailing edge

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 73

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.8 Adjusting the Scanner Section

1.8.1 Installing glass

(a) Installing ADF glass

To install new ADF glass, wipe off the mounting

surface and mount the glass by placing it at the

position shown right.

043-3

ADF glass

Fig. 1-8-1

Fig. 1-8-2

Fig. 1-8-3

Stopper

(b) Installing original glass

Original glass should be installed in the following

manner:

Tab

1. Place the ADF glass by aligning with the posi-

tioning tab.

Original

glass

2. Hold original glass to the stopper and tighten 4

screws.

043-4

3. Hold original glass stay to original glass and

tighten 2 screws.

Screw

Original glass stay

Original glass

Screw

043-5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 74

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After installing scanner unit, hold the document to

the ADF glass and make a copy. Check the image

for tilt. If tilt has occurred, make adjustments in the

following manner:

Screw

1. If an Original Cover (KA-1600PC), ADF (MR-

2012), or the RADF (MR-3011) is attached to

the copier, detach it.

043-6

2. If a STP (KK-1600) is attached to the copier,

disconnect the power cable.

Fig. 1-8-4

3. Detach the manual pocket.

4. Detach top cover.

(See Fig. 2-6-2 of the Service Manual)

5. Loosen 6 screws retaining original glass.

6. If the tilt is as shown below, loosen 6 screws retaining stopper, move (adjust) original glass stopper

plate to the front side, and then secure it.

Stopper

Tab

Original glass

043-7-1

043-7-2

Fig. 1-8-5

7. If the tilt is as shown below, loosen 6 screws retaining stopper, move (adjust) original glass stopper

plate to the rear side, and then secure it.

Stopper

Tab

Original glass

043-8-2

043-8-1

Fig. 1-8-6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 75

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.8.2 Installing the scanner motor

When mounting the scanner motor, adjust the tension of timing belt 142 and timing belt 157 in the

following manner.

Scanner motor

Note: When mounting, do not mix up the screws.

1. Loosely tighten the scanner motor and scan-

ner motor bracket assembly using 2 screws and

mount timing belt 142. (There should be suffi-

cient play to enable the scanner motor and

scanner motor bracket assembly respectively

to move right-to-left.)

048-3

Fig. 1-8-7

2. Mount the belt tension jig and spring jig (wire).

Rotate the scanner motor pulley two to three

turns to allow the timing belt and pulley to be

Belt tension jig

securely meshing.

Spring jig

(wire)

Secure the 2 screws loosely tightened in step

3. Apply screw lock paint to the 2 screws secured.

4. Remove the belt tension jig and spring jig used

in step 2

048-4

Fig. 1-8-8

5. Loosely tighten the scanner motor bracket as-

sembly to the scanner motor assembly using 4

screws.

(There should be sufficient play to enable the

scanner motor bracket assembly to move right-

Spring jig

to-left.)

(belt)

Mount timing belt 157.

6. Mount the spring jig (belt).

Rotate scanner motor pulley two to three turns

048-5

Fig. 1-8-9

to allow the tooth sides of timing belt 157 and

gear to be securely meshing.

Screw

Secure the 4 screws loosely tightened in step

7. Apply screw lock paint to the 4 screws secured.

048-2-1

8. Remove the spring jig used in step 6.

Screw lock point

048-6

Fig. 1-8-10

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 76

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.8.3 Adjusting the carriage 1

(a) Installing carriage 1

Roller

When installing carriage 1, make adjustments in

the following manner:

Holding part

1. Pass the lamp cable over the roller of carriage

2 and place carriage 1 on scanner.

2. Reliably hold the carriage 2 holding part to the

left side frame.

Lamp cable

Carriage 2

057-1

Carriage 1

Fig. 1-8-11

3. Securely hold the carriage 1 holding part to the

left side frame.

Holding part

Carriage 1

4. Tighten 2 screws to secure carriage 1 to wire.

Screw

057-2

Carriage 1

Fig. 1-8-12

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 77

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(b) Image distortion adjustment

After installing scanner assembly in the copier, make an copy (LD: NAD model, A3: MJD/CND/AUD/

ASD/SAD models) and check it for skew. If skew occurs, make adjustments in the following manner:

1. If the skew is as shown below, with carriage 1 securely held to the left side frame, loosen the wire

fixing screw on the front side, separate (adjust) the front side of carriage 1, and then secure it.

Carriage 1

057-3-1

Screw

057-3-2

Fig. 1-8-13

2. If the skew is as shown below, with carriage 1 securely held to the left side frame, loosen the wire

fixing screw on the rear side, separate (adjust) the rear side of carriage 1, and then secure it.

Carriage 1

Screw

057-4-1

Carriage 1

057-4-2

Fig. 1-8-14

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 78

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.8.4 Installing carriage 2

(a) Wire tension adjustment

1. Install wire on carriage 2 by winding up as

shown below.

Wire

Scanner drive shaft

061

Fig. 1-8-15

2. Remove the clip jig mounted on scanner drive

Wire holder

Screw

shaft.

3. Place the spring jig (wire) tension gauge on wire

holder and scanner drive shaft and then screw

it.

Scanner

drive shaft

Spring jig (Wire)

062-1

Fig. 1-8-16

4. Remove the spring jig (wire) gauge and loosen

2 screws retaining slide plate.

Slide plate

Screw

062-2

Fig. 1-8-17

5. To take up the winding slack of wire, move car-

riage 2 back and forth once (to the center of

scanner) and securely hold the carriage to the

left side frame.

Slide plate

Carriage 2

6. Tighten 2 screws to secure slide plate.

Screw

062-3

Fig. 1-8-18

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 79

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Apply the screw lock paint to all the screws se-

cured.

(b) Installing the wire to the pulleys

Winding the wire on pulley.

1. Fit the φ3.2 spherical terminal at the center of

the wire into the hole in the wire winding pulley.

Wind up the wires on the front and rear sides,

respectively, as shown below and secure the

wire with the clip jig to prevent it from getting

loose.

Pulley

Ball terminal

065-10

Fig. 1-8-19

[Rear Side]

Hook

[Front Side]

Wire

Hook

Scanner drive shaft

065-01

Spherical

terminal

Spherical

terminal

Fig. 1-8-20

Hook

Wire

Clip jig

Ball terminal

Clip jig

065-11

Fig. 1-8-21

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 80

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes:

1. When winding the wire on the pulley, keep

No gap should exist No gap should exist

the following points in mind.

• Do not wind the wire while twisting.

• Tensely wind the wire so that it will be

placed in contact with the pulley.

• Wind the wire without leaving gaps.

• Be careful not to allow the wound wire

to be shifted or come loose.

065-12

Fig. 1-8-22

2. When fitting wire holder jigs, take care so

that the turns wound on the pulleys do not

move or unwind.

Wire

Clip jig

Pulley

Clip jig

065-13

Ball terminal

065-14

Clip jig

Fig. 1-8-23

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 81

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.8.5 CCD unit

Screw

(a) Replacing the CCD unit

• Since the lens unit was precisely adjusted at the

factory, it must not be readjusted in the field or

some of its components must not be replaced. If

necessary, the lens unit should be replaced as a

unit.

• When replacing the CCD unit, remove the fol-

lowing 3 screws only. Do not loosen or remove

other screws.

Screw

065-15-1

Fig. 1-8-24

• Use sufficient care when handling the lens unit. Never hold the precision-adjusted area of the lens unit.

065-17-1

065-18-1

Fig. 1-8-25

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 82

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(b) Installing CCD unit

When changing CCD unit, install the unit in the fol-

lowing manner:

1. With CCD unit temporarily mounted, set the jig.

Note: When setting the CCD jig, there must be

no space between CCD unit and the spe-

cial CCD jig.

CCD Jig

CCD unit

065-03-1

Fig. 1-8-26

2. Adjust the position of CCD unit for the offset

value (unit: mm) provided on CCD unit and then

secure it with the screw.

Offset value (+2.00)

CCD unit

CCD Jig

Note: Move the unit to the right of the center when

the offset value is plus, and to the left of

the center when minus. (one division: 1

mm) and then secure CCD unit.

Ex. The figure below shows an example

where the offset value is “+2.00.”

065-04-1

Fig. 1-8-27

3. After assembling the copier completely, make

a copy of document and check the image.

4. If the copy image is enlarged or reduced, read-

just.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 83

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Remove original glass. (See Fig. 7-8-7 of the Service Manual)

2. Remove the blind plate. (See Fig. 7-8-16 and 7-8-17 of the Service Manual)

3. Place the CCD jig on CCD unit and loosen 3 screws.

4. Using the marks on the scanner base as a guide, adjust the CCD unit in either forward or backward

direction.

The following table shows the error in the reproduction ratio between the copies and actual rulers

compared to be measured, and the amount of adjustment of the CCD unit.

Reproduction-ratio

error

Amount of

adjustment

4.77 mm

4.37 mm

3.98 mm

3.58 mm

3.18 mm

2.78 mm

2.39 mm

1.99 mm

1.59 mm

1.19 mm

0.80 mm

0.40 mm

0.00 mm

Reproduction-ratio

error

Amount of

adjustment

-0.39 mm

-0.78 mm

-1.16 mm

-1.55 mm

-1.94 mm

-2.33 mm

-2.71 mm

-3.10 mm

-3.49 mm

-3.88 mm

-4.26 mm

-4.65 mm

-1.2%

0.1%

-1.1%

0.2%

-1.0%

0.3%

-0.9%

0.4%

-0.8%

0.5%

-0.7%

0.6%

-0.6%

0.7%

-0.5%

0.8%

-0.4%

0.9%

-0.3%

1.0%

-0.2%

1.1%

-0.1%

1.2%

0.0%

5. If the copy image is enlarged, move the unit to

the right for adjustment.

065-04-2

Fig. 1-8-28

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 84

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. If the copy image is reduced, move the unit to

the left for adjustment.

065-04-3

Fig. 1-8-29

7. After adjustment, apply the screw lock paint to

3 screws secured.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 85

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.9 Adjusting the main drive gear

assembly

Screw (B)

Main drive gear assembly

2 screws (A)

1. Loosen 2 screws (A) retaining the backlash ad-

justing gear of the main drive gear assembly.

2. Locate the main drive gear assembly in the

copier and temporarily tighten 7 screws (B).

Screw (B)

Fig. 1-9-1

Bushing plate

3. Loosen one screw and remove the bushing

plate.

Fig. 1-9-2

4. Place the drive gear jig by aligning with the drum

shaft and the process unit positioning stud.

Drum shaft

Process unit

positioning stud

Drive gear jig

Fig. 1-9-3

5. Loosen the wing screw and hold the drive gear

jig arm to the registration roller.

Wing screw

6. Place the tab of the drive gear jig arm in the

hole and tighten the wing screw.

Tab

Drive gear jig arm

Registration roller

Fig. 1-9-4

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 86

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. While pressing down the drive gear jig, tighten

7 finger-tight screws (B) of the main drive gear

assembly.

Screw (B)

8. Loosen the wing screw, release the tab of the

drive gear jig arm, and remove the drive gear

jig.

Drive gear jig arm

Drive gear jig

Screw (B)

Fig. 1-9-5

9. Mount 2 screws.

10. Mount the bushing plate and tighen 2 screws.

Screw

Bushing plate

Screw

Fig. 1-9-6

11. Turn the main motor counterclockwise two or

three times.

Main motor

Fig. 1-9-7

12. Release the jam lever of the fuser.

Fuser

Jam lever

Fig. 1-9-8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 87

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. Slowly rotate the main motor clockwise (2 or 3

turns) until the gear of the fuser unit starts ro-

tating (for e-STUDIO160 series).

Main motor

Gear

09-1

Fig. 1-9-9

14. Slowly turn the main motor clockwise two or

three times and check that the stud no longer

moves (for e-STUDIO200/250 series).

Main motor

Fig. 1-9-10

Fuser

15. Lock the jam lever of the fuser.

Jam lever

Fig. 1-9-11

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 88

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16. Tighten the screw (A) while holding the plate

so that the place will not be dislodged.

Plate

Screw (A)

Fig. 1-9-12

Note: With the fuser reliably mounted, the collar

of the main drive gear assembly should

turn with a slight load when it is turned.

Main drive gear assembly

Collar

Fig. 1-9-13

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 89

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.10 MAIN PWA replacement procedure

1. Downloading of the MAIN PWA firmware

For details, see chapter 5 of the Service Handbook.

2. Execution of 08-388 mode. (Reading of the total counter value)

SET

Power OFF

Power ON

START

3. RAM Clear with the [1], [3], and [*] keys.

1 3

Power ON

Warming up

Power OFF

4. Execution of 08-665 mode (05: adjustment clear/08: programming clear)

SET

Power OFF

Power ON

START

5. RAM Clear with the [1], [3], and [#] keys.

1 3 #

Warming up

Power OFF

Power ON

6. Download the scanner PWA firmware, if necessary, after confirming the version of it.

7. Settings for the country code or region code

Without Fax kit

Setting the country or region code for the

CND .

LT:

SET

A4:

CND:

Power ON

START

With Fax kit

See the 1.2.6 of the Service Handbook (GD-1061).

8. Settings for the date and time

For details, see chapter 5 of the Operator's Manual.

SETTING

PROGRAM

DD-MM-YYYY DAY HH:MM

15-01-2003 WED 10:10PM

INITIAL SETUP

DATE & TIME

9. Writing in memory (entering the drum counter value (DRUM COUNTER), long size counter value

(A3/LD) and short size counter value (A4/LT)).

For the setting value, refer to the DRUM UNIT LIST printed before replacing the MAIN PWA.

When the DRUM UNIT LIST is not printed, perform the following setting.

Drum counter value:

Find a remainder by dividing the total counter value (08-351) by the pro-

cess unit life value (27k or 33k).

Enter the value obtained by multiplying the remainder by 10.

Long size counter value: Enter "0."

Short size counter value: Enter the remainder obtained by dividing the total counter value (08-351)

by the process unit life value (27k or 33k).

For the setting procedures, refer to section 1.2.5 of the Service Handbook.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

1 - 90

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. Entering the adjustment value for the printing position.

Enter the setting value for the following 21 items.

For the setting values, refer to the FUNCTION LIST printed before replacing the MAIN PWA, or the

FUNCTION LIST on the inside of the rear cover of the copier.

When the FUNCTION LIST is not printed in 08-404/401/251/252, perform the following setting.

08-404: Enter the remainder obtained by dividing the total counter value (08-351) by the process

unit life value (27k or 33k).

08-401: Find a remainder by dividing the total counter value (08-351) by the process life unit value

(27k or 33k).

Enter the value obtained by multiplying the remainder by 4.7 (for e-STUDIO160/200 series)

or 4.5 (for e-STUDIO250 series).

08-251: When it was set before the MAIN PWA was replaced, perform the setting again.

08-252: Enter the remainder obtained by dividing the total counter value (08-351) by the PM life

value (81k or 99k).

When 08-251 is “0,” however, it is not necessary to enter the 08-252 value.

For the setting procedures, refer to sections 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 of the Service Handbook.

1: 05-205 (Developer bias DC adjustment)

2: 05-210 (Grid voltage initial value adjustment)

3: 05-220 Transfer H

4: 05-221 Transfer C

5: 05-233 Separation H

6: 05-234 Separation C

7: 05-235 Separation L

8: 05-400 (Printer primary scanning reproduction ratio)

9: 05-410 (Laser start position)

10: 05-421 (Printer secondary scanning reproduction ratio)

11: 05-440 (Leading edge)

12: 05-430 (Top margin)

13: 05-431 (Left margin)

14: 05-432 (Right margin)

15: 05-433 (Bottom margin)

16: 08-404 (Developer material counter)

17: 08-401 (Drum life counter)

18: 08-251 (PM counter setting value)

19: 08-252 (PM counter present value)

20: 08-446 Transfer ON position

21: 08-447 Transfer OFF position

11. Sensor test in the [1] [3] test mode.

1: Confirm whether the attached options are reflected on the bit information correctly.

2: Refer to 1.2.4 of the Service Handbook.

12. SRAM test/DRAM test/Clock IC test/CODEC test mode.

For details, see chapter 8 of the Operator’s Manual.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 91

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.11 Measurement of Transfer Guide Bias

The transfer charger bias is applied to the pinch roller and the paper guide plate to prevent the transfer

charger charge from escaping through the recording paper during transfer. To analyze the cause of a

transfer failure which has occurred, you can output the transfer guide bias in the output test at any time

and then measure the voltage.

Important:

Measure the transfer guide bias with the toner cartridge and the process unit taken out from the copier

and the front cover open. Also, keep the front cover switch and interlock switch (front cover) ON by using

the switch jigs (big/small).

Power ON

10.OUTPUT TEST

SET

FUNCTION TEST

09.CODEC TEST

10.OUTPUT TEST

11.PRINTER BOARD TEST

: Enter the "Developer Bias Transformer ON/OFF" code.

Important:

SET

Before outputting the transfer guide bias, it is necessary to turn

the developer bias ON.

START

: Developer bias ON

Warning:

High voltage is output from the developer bias terminal. NEVER

touch the terminal while measuring.

Developer bias measuring plate

CANCEL

01-11-01

: Enter the "Transfer Guide Bias ON/OFF" code.

SET

To next page

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

1 - 92

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

From preceding page

START

: Turn the transfer guide bias ON.

Measure the transfer guide bias at the following two points:

Important:

The settings and conditions of the digital tester to be used for measurement are as

follows:

Function switch: DC

Full scale:

Remark:

1000V

The digital tester to be used should have an input resistance

value of 10MΩ or more.

Measurement value: +375 20V

To measure on the pinch roller:

Frame grounding

Pinch roller

terminal

01-11-02

terminal

To measure on the paper guide plate:

Frame grounding

Paper guide plate

terminal

01-11-03

terminal

: Turn the transfer guide bias OFF.

: End the output test.

CLEAR/STOP

CANCEL

Power OFF

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

1 - 93

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.12 Adjustment of the doctor-sleeve gap

Tool to be used: Doctor-sleeve jig

(1) Remove the toner cartridge and process unit.

(2) Detach the drum assembly and dispose the developer material (Chapter 3-4 [G] in the Service Manual).

(3) Remove the 2 screws and detach the developer cover.

Place the drum assembly on a flat surface.

(4) Loosen 3 screws fixing the doctor blade.

(5) Insert the jig of the gauge “0.275” into the gap between the magnetic roller and doctor blade.

The jig should be inserted into the positions of 3 screws.

(6) Tighten the screws while the doctor blade is pressed against the doctor-sleeve jig lightly.

(7) Insert the jig of the gauge “0.25” into the gap between the magnetic roller and doctor blade.

Confirm that the jig moves smoothly to the front and rear sides and the jig of the gauge “0.30” cannot

be inserted into the gap.

Doctor-sleeve jig

Doctor blade

Doctor-sleeve jig

Doctor blade

Magnetic roller

3-4-26

Fig. 1-13-1

(8) Close the developer cover and reconfirm the gap. If the gap is out of the specified value, repeat the

procedure from (4).

When closing the developer cover, do not push the magnetic roller guide.

(9) Apply the screw lock paint to 3 screws.

Note: Do not rotate the magnetic roller until the adjustment is completed. If the magnetic roller is rotated

during the adjustment, repeat the procedure from (4).

e-STUDIO160/200/250 ADJUSTMENT

1 - 94

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2.1 Maintenance Performed Every 81,000 (e-STUDIO160/200 Series) and

99,000 Copies (e-STUDIO250 Series)

(1) Preparation

Ask user about the current machine condition and note them down.

Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and save them.

Turn OFF the power, and be sure to unplug the copier.

(2) Perform preventive maintenance using the following checklist and the illustrations. Refer to the Ser-

vice Manual and Parts List if necessary.

(3) When the maintenance is finished, plug in the copier, turn ON the power, and make a few copies to

confirm that the copier is working properly.

2.2 Preventive Maintenance Check List

Symbols used in the check list

Cleaning

Lubrication

GR GR Grease

(X5-6020)

Replacing

Operation check

Date

Cleaning with

alcohol

27K Every 27,000 copies After cleaning or User’s name

33K Every 33,000 copies replacing, check Serial No.

81K Every 81,000 copies for no abnormality Inspector’s

Cleaning with

soft pad, cloth or

White grease

(Molykote HP-300) 99K Every 99,000 copies

FL Floil (GE-334C) 135K Every 135,000 copies

name

vacuum cleaner FL

Remarks

Silicon oil

AV Alvania No. 2

165K Every 165,000 copies

Replace if deformed

or damaged

Notes: 1. Perform cleaning and apply lubrication every 81,000 copies for e-STUDIO160/200 series and

99,000 copies for e-STUDIO250 series.

2. <P-I> under "Remarks" indicates page and item number in the Parts List.

3. Replacement cycle of the parts of the feeding section depends on the number of papers fed

from each paper source.

4. Values under "Replacement" indicates the replacement cycle for the e-STUDIO160/200 series

e-STUDIO250 series.

5. Do not put oil on the rollers and belts when lubricating them.

6. Replace the parts with the life of 27,000 copies (e-STUDIO160/200 series) and 33,000 copies

(e-STUDIO250 series) listed in the check list.

7. Replace the heat roller (metallic gold or dark green) and PM kit (FU-KIT-1600N and FU-KIT-

2500N) at every 135,000 copies (e-STUDIO160/200 series) and 165,000 copies (e-STUDIO250

series).

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN (Front view)

2-1-1

* For an unspecified number, refer to the Parts List.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN (Rear view)

49 50 53

2-1-2

38 37

* For an unspecified number, refer to the Parts List.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 3

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section

Item to check

1. Process unit

Cleaning Lubri- Replacement Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

cation

check

Process unit

Photoconductive drum

Drum cleaning blade

Recoverly sheet

Charger case

27K/33K

Charger wire

27K/33K

81K/99K

27K/33K

81K/99K

Charger wire cleaner

Grid

Separation claw for drum

Sheet cover

Sheet cover B

Developer material

Discharge lamp

Magnetic roller

Magnetic roller spacer

Drum gear

Cleaner paddle drive

gear

Toner recovery auger

drive gear

Doctor blade

2. Ozone filter 1

Ozone filter 2

81K/99K

<P2-I23>

Main charger wire

HVPS contacts

*10

Around-Process 5. Toner supply motor

Gear teeth

unit area

7. Registration roller

8. Pinch roller gear

Ground plate

Gear teeth <P15-I20>

(e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Between the shaft of registration

roller and ground plate <P15-I22>

*10

Fuser unit

12. Fuser unit

13. Pressure roller

81K/99K or

135K/165K

81K/99K

*11

14. Heat roller (Brown)

Heat roller (Metallic gold)

Heat roller (Dark green)

15. Heater lamp

*12, *13

135K/165K

135K/—

16. Separation claw for heat

roller

81K/99K or

135K/165K

81K/99K or

135K/165K

*14

*15

17. Cleaning roller

18. Thermostat 1/2

19. Heater thermistor 1/2

Pressure roller cover

*16

*17

<P27-I3> (e-STUDIO160 series)

<P28-I3> (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

<P27-I4> (e-STUDIO160 series)

<P28-I4> (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Shaft

Pressure roller case

22. HR drive gear 1

23. HR drive gear 3

23. Inner HR drive gear 3

92. HR drive gear 2

Shaft

Shaft (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

<P27-I9> (e-STUDIO160 series)

<P28-I9> (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

*13

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section

Scanner

Item to check

24. Shading sheet

Cleaning Lubri- Replacement Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

cation

check

*18

*19

*20

*21

25. Reflecting mirror 1

26. Reflecting mirror 2

27. Reflecting mirror 3

28. Original glass

29. ADF glass

or A

30. CCD unit

Using the blower (Do not use a

cloth)

31. Exposure lamp

Laser scanner

unit

32. Laser scanner unit

Using the blower (Do not use a

cloth)

Transfer charger 33. Transfer charger unit

unit

Transfer wire

81K/99K

*22

*23

<P7-I9>

35. Transfer guide roller

36. Tray-up Motor

37. Tray-up gear 1

38. Tray-up gear 2

39. Tray-up gear 3

40. Tray-up gear 4

41. Tray-up gear 5

42. Cassette feed gear 2

<P7-I16>

Tray-up unit

Gear teeth

Main drive unit

Gear teeth

Main drive unit

Gear teeth (Never apply the

timing belt)

43. Cassette feed gear 3

44. Cassette feed gear 4

45. Cassette feed gear 5

46. Cassette feed gear 6

47. Cassette feed gear 7

48. Cassette feed gear 8

49. Transmission gear 1

50. Transmission gear 2

51. Transmission gear 3

52. Registration drive gear

53. Main drive gear 1

54. Main drive gear 2

55. Main drive gear 3

56. Main drive gear 4

57. Main drive gear 5

58. Main drive gear 6

E-ring E-8

Shaft and gear teeth

Shaft

Shaft and gear teeth

<P11-I103>

73. Drum drive gear

74. 2nd feed clutch

60. Exit drive gear 2

61. Exit drive gear 3

62. Exit drive gear 4

63. Exit drive gear 6

64. Exit roller

Gear teeth

Exit drive

Gear teeth

*24

*25

*26

*27

*28

<P8-I43>

Paper feed unit

65. Pickup roller

81K/99K

66. 2nd pinch roller

2nd paper guide

<P16-I11>

<P16-I1>

Paper guide

69. 2nd feed roller

Spring

<P16-I4>

Paper guide unit 71. Separation roller

72. Feed roller

81K/99K

*29

*30

Shaft and gear teeth

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes on the Preventive Maintenance Checklist

*1. Photoconductive drum

Refer to "3.6 Checking and Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum".

*2. Drum cleaning blade

Since the edge of the blade is breakable and can be easily damaged by matters such as the

adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade with a new one if poor images are copied due

to the damaged blade regardless of the number of copies which have been made.

*3. Main charger case/main charger wire

Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and then squeezed tightly.

Note: Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 358mm).

· Do not twist the wire.

· Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.

*4. Separation claws for the drum

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the separation claw is damaged or deformed. If there is

any problem with it, replace the claw with a new one regardless of the number of copies which have

been made.

If any mark which was made by the claw appears on the copied image, clean the tip of the claw.

Notes:1. Wipe the tip of the claw lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it.

Do not leave the lint on the tip.

2. Apply patting power to the tip of the claws and drum surface after replacing or cleaning

them to reduce the load on the drum surface by the claw.

*5. Magnetic roller

If a white banding appears on the magnetic roller, clean the area between the magnetic roller and

doctor blade with the doctor blade cleaning jig.

Doctor blade cleaning jig

Doctor blade

Magnetic roller

2-6

*6. Magnetic roller spacer

Confirm that the magnetic roller spacer is rotated. If not rotated, replace the magnetic roller spacer

with a new one.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*7. Drum gear/Cleaner paddle drive gear/Toner recovery auger drive gear

Confirm that toner or foreign matters is not stuck to the drum gear, cleaner paddle drive gear or

toner recover auger drive gear.

If stuck, remove the drum rear cover and clean the gear as required.

Toner recovery auger

drive gear

Drum assembly

Cleaner paddle

drive gear

Drum rear cover

Drum gear

2-7

*8. Doctor blade

Confirm that the doctor-sleeve gap is within the specified value. If not, adjust the gap. (For the

specified value and adjustment procedure, refer to section 1.13 “Adjustment of the doctor-sleeve

gap” on page 1-95.)

*9. Main charger wire

To clean the wire, use a charger cleaner.

*10. HVPS contacts (Feed roller contact/DEV. Contact/PU contact)/Ground plate

Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung strongly to clean the contacts surface.

*11. Pressure roller

Refer to “3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Pressure Roller”.

*12. Heat roller

Refer to “3.4 Checking and Cleaning of the Heat Roller”.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*13. HR drive gear 2

Every time when the HR drive gear 2 or heat roller (metallic gold or dark green) is replaced (135K/

165K), wipe the old oil up and apply 0.075g of white grease (molykote HP-300) to the area around

the boss inside of HR drive gear 2.

HR drive gear 2

Boss

*14. Cleaning roller

Refer to “3.3 Checking and Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller”.

*15. Separation claw

Replace any claws if its tip is damaged, regardless of the specified number of the copies for re-

placement. If toner is fused tightly on the tip of claws, the tip may be damaged if you try to scrape

the toner off forcefully. So, replace any claws that are heavily

*16. Pressure roller cover

To clean the inside of the pressure roller cover, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and

then wrung lightly.

*17. Pressure roller case

Check if the outside surfaces including the bottom surfaces are dirty, and clean if necessary.

*18. Shading sheet

To clean the backside of the original glass, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*19. Reflecting mirror 1/Reflecting mirror 2/Reflecting mirror 3

To clean the surface of the reflecting mirrors, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*20. Original glass/ADF glass

To clean the surface of the glasses, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung

strongly.

*21. CCD unit

To clean the lens of the CCD, use a blower.

*22. Transfer wire

To clean the wire, use a charger cleaner.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*23. Transfer guide roller

Refer to “3.5 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Guide Roller”.

*24. Exit roller

To clean the surface of the exit roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung

strongly.

*25. Pickup roller

To clean the surface of the pickup roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*26. 2nd pinch roller

To clean the surface of the 2nd pinch roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*27. Paper guide/2nd paper guide

To clean the surface of the paper guides, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*28. 2nd feed roller

To clean the surface of the 2nd feed roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*29. Separation roller

To clean the surface of the separation roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then

wrung strongly.

*30. Feed roller

To clean the surface of the feed roller, use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung

strongly.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 9

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MY-1015

2-1

2-3

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

cation

ment

check

Tray-up unit

1. Tray-up Motor

2. Tray-up gear 1

3. Tray-up gear 2

4. Tray-up gear 3

5. Tray-up gear 4

6. Tray-up gear 5

Gear teeth, see page 2-3/2-5

Shaft and gear teeth

<P3-I16>

Gears

7. PFU joint gear 06B

8. PFU joint gear 06A

10. Feed roller

Rollers

11. Pickup roller

<P3-I29>

12. Separation roller

13. Spring

<P3-I20>

Other

<P3-I19>

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 10

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MD-0101

2-2

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

cation

ment

check

Motor gears

1. Gear GG0SSW4/USS044

2. Gear 08S024-06

3. Gear 08S018-06

4. Gear 08S18-06CL

5. ADU motor

Shaft and gear teeth

Gear teeth

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 11

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MY-1016

2-4

Section

Rollers

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

cation

ment

check

1. Feed roller

2. Pickup roller

3. Separation pad

4. Spring

Other

<P2-I28>

<P1-I5>

5. Document tray upper

MR-3011

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

cation

ment

check

Clutch gears

1. RADF clutch gear 56/16

2. RADF clutch gear 40/24

3. RADF clutch gear 20

4. RADF clutch gear 66

5. RADF clutch gear 25

6. Feed roller

Gear teeth

Rollers

7. Pickup roller

8. Separation pad

9. Separation roller

MJ-5002

Section

Item to check

1. OCT exit roller

2. OCT gear frame

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

cation

ment

check

Roller

Shaft <P2-I19>

Frame

Shaft <P1-I17>

MJ-5001

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

<P-I>

Shaft <P1-I66>

cation

ment

check

Gears

Other

1. Gear 08S012-05H

2. JSP gear pulley

3. JSP flapper

Shaft <P1-I61>

Shaft <P1-I54>

Shaft <P1-I42>

4. JSP exit roller shaft

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 12

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-1009

2-5

Section

Gears

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

cation

ment

check

1. Gear GG10S018/05H073

2. Gear GG10S018/05H048

3. Gear GP10S018/3GT031

4. Gear 10S031-06

5. Gear 10S016-06

6. Gear GP10S016/2GT027

7. Gear GP10S028/3GT031

8. Gear 10S028-06

9. Gear 10S020-06

10. Gear 10S16-06

Shaft and gear teeth

Gear teeth

11. Gear 22-clutch

Gear teeth

Other

12. Feed roller

(MY-1017)

13. Bush (POM)

14. Tension pulley

Shaft

15. Pickup roller

16. Separation roller

MR-2012

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

cation ment check

Remarks

Rollers

1. Feed roller

2. Pickup roller

3. Separation pad

4. Separation roller

KD-1010

Section

Item to check

Cleaning Lubri- Replace- Operation

Remarks

cation

ment

check

Rollers

Gears

1. Feed roller (Upper/Lower)

2. Pickup roller (Upper/Lower)

3. Separation roller

(Upper/Lower)

4. Drive gears

Gear teeth

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 13

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.3 PM Kit

No. of copies for

replacement cycle

Kit name

Classification of kits

PART NAME

Q’ty

e-STUDIO160/ e-STUDIO250

200 series

series

CH-KIT-1600

Transfer wire

WIRE-TC

Guide roller gear

Defense sheet R

Defense sheet F

Guide roller

GEAR-RLR-GUIDE

SHEET-DEFENSE-R

SHEET-DEFENSE-F

ROLLER-GUIDE

BUSH-RLR-GUIDE

K-ROLL-SPT

81K

99K

Guide roller bush

ROL-KIT-16CST Separation roller

Feed roller

K-ROLL-FEED

81K

27K

81K

99K

33K

99K

Pickup roller

ROLLER-PICK-AT

PU-KIT-1600

Drum cleaning blade BL-1600D

Recovery sheet

Sheet cover

Drum scraper

Charger

SHEET-RECOV

SHEET-COVER

CHEET-COVER-B

SCRAPER-DRUM-S

WIRE-CHG-S

Grid

K-GRID-13

DEV-KIT-1610

FU-KIT-1600N

Developer

D-1600

Cleaning pad

Ozone filter 1

Ozone filter 2

Cleaning roller

K-HLDR-PAD

FILTER-OZON-TY1

FILTER-OZON-TY2

RLR-FUS-CLN

Cleaning roller bush BUSH-CL-RLR

Heat roller bush

Idle gear

BUSH-HR/RLR

GEAR-HT/IDLE

SEP-HT/RLR

HR-1600-L

135K

e-STUDIO160

series)

(

Separation finger

Pressure roller

Heat roller

HR-1600-UN

(Metallic gold)

Cleaning roller

FU-KIT-2500N

RLR-FUS-CLN

Cleaning roller bush BUSH-CL-RLR

Heat roller bush

Idle gear

BUSH-HR/RLR

GER1-HT/IDLE-AW

GER2-HT/IDLE-AW

SEP-HT/RLR

135K

e-STUDIO200

series)

165K

(

Separation finger

Pressure roller

Heat roller

HR-2500-L

HR-2500-UN

(Metallic gold)

Pickup roller

ROL-KIT-1010

ROL-PICK-UP

160K

e-STUDIO200

series)

Feed roller

ROL-PAPER-FED-F

ROL-PAPER-FED-S

(

160K

Separation roller

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2 - 14

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.4 List of Adjustment Tools

No.

Classification of tools

Name

Parts List

Page Item

Clip jig

ASM-HLD-W-AT

JIG-CCDUNIT-AT

SPE-TENS-WIRE

SPE-TENS-BELT

ASM-GBOX-JIG

CCD jig

Spring jig (wire)

Spring jig (belt)

Drive gear jig

High-voltage measurement jig ASM-P/U-TOOL

Scanner recovery PWA

Main recovery PWA

Doctor-sleeve jig

PWA-F-SCNRCV-AT

PWA-F-RCV-AT

K-JIG-DC-SL

10 Doctor-blade cleaning jig

11 Belt tension jig

MYLER-SCRAPER

PLT-JIG-ADJ-MOT

ASY-JIG-FGAP

12 Fuser gap jig

2.5 List of Grease

Lubrication

Name

Volume Container

Parts List

Page Item

GR Grease (X5-6020)

MOLYKOTE-100

ASM-SILICONE-1M

ASM-PG-ALV2-S

100g

100cc

100g

10g

Tube

Bottle

Tube

Bottle

SI Silicon oil (TSF451-1M)

AV Alvania grease No.2

White grease (Molykote HP-300) ASM-PG-HP300-S

White grease (Molykote HP-300) GREASE-HP300-S

14A

14B

FL Floil (GE-334C)

ASM-GE334C-S

20g

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 15

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES

3.1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies

A. Toner cartridge

Toner cartridge and process unit should be stored in a shaded place where the ambient temperature is

between 10 to 35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during trans-

portation.

B. Process unit (Developer material, Photoconductive drum, Drum cleaning blade)

Like toner cartridge, process unit should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is

between 10 to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where process unit may be subjected to

high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.

C. Pressure roller

Avoid places where the pressure roller may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical

gas.

D. Cleaning roller

Avoid places where the cleaning roller may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.

It should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.

E. Heat roller

Avoid places where the heat roller may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.

F. Copy paper

Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.

After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 1 e-STUDIO160/200/250 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Pressure Roller

(1) Handling precautions

Do not allow any hard object to hit or rub against the surface.

Do not stain the pressure roller surface with any oil of fingerprints, etc.

Do not allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch the pressure roller surface.

(2) Cleaning procedure

Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung strongly to clean the pressure roller surface.

3.3 Checking and Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller

(1) Handling precautions

Do not allow any hard object to hit or rub against the surface.

Do not stain the pressure roller surface with any oil of fingerprints, etc.

Do not allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch the pressure roller surface.

(2) Checking

Defective heat roller cleaning should be judged by the toner deposited on the pressure roller surface

It toner is heavily adhered on the heat roller surface, defective cleaning any occur. If this happens, replace

the cleaning roller.

Replace it preferably after about 81K copies for e-STUDIO160 series and 99K copies for e-STUDIO200/

250 series have been made.

(3) Cleaning procedure

Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung strongly to clean the cleaning roller surface.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES 3 - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.4 Checking and Cleaning of the Heat Roller

(1) Handling Precautions

Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the heat roller.

Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the heat roller, or they may be dam-

aged, possibly resulting in defective cleaning.

(2) Checking

Check for stain and damage on the heat roller and clean if necessary.

Clean the separation claws and check for chipped claw tips.

Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.

Check the thermistor for proper contact with the heat roller.

Check the fused condition of the toner image.

(3) Cleaning Procedure for Heat Roller

When heat roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the heat roller surface clean

with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the heat roller while they are still warm.

Note: Be careful not to rub the heat roller surface with your fingernails or hard objects because it can be

easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the heat roller.

3.5 Checking and Replacing of the Transfer Guide Roller

(1) Handling Precautions

Do not touch the transfer guide roller surface with your bare hands.

Be careful not to leave any scratch or dent on the transfer guide roller surface.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 3 e-STUDIO160/200/250 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.6 Checking and Cleaning of the Photoconductive Drum

(1) Use of gloves

Since fingerprints or oil stains on the drum surface affects the quality of the copy image and degrades

the characteristics of the photoconductor, do not touch the drum surface with your bare hands.

(2) Handling precautions

As the drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing or removing

it so as not to damage its surface.

When the drum is replaced with a new one, apply patting powder (lubricant) on the entire surface of

the new drum (including both edges to where the OPC is not coated) and separation claw of the

cleaner before installing them. The drum counter must be cleared to 0 (zero) in the setting mode 08-

673.

Notes: 1. Application of the patting powder is to reduce friction among the drum, the cleaning blade and

the separation claw. If this process is not performed, the drum and the cleaning blade may be

damaged.

2. Remove any fibers or lint adhering to the blade since they can damage the drum and blade, or

allows defective cleaning.

(3) Installation of the copier and storage of the drum

Do not install the copier in a place where it may be exposed to high temperature, high humidity,

chemicals and/or chemical gas.

Do not leave the drum in a brightly lit place for a long time. Otherwise, it would be fatigued and causes

background fogging on the copied image right after it is installed in the machine. However, this phe-

nomenon will decrease as time elapses.

(4) Cleaning the drum

At the preventive maintenance, wipe the entire surface of the drum softly using the specified cleaning

cotton (dry soft pad). Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton so as not to touch the drum surface directly

with your fingertips or nails. Remove your rings and wristwatch before cleaning so as not to damage

the drum.

Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or silicone oil as they have a bad influence on the drum.

Do not use selenium refresher either.

(5) Scratches on the photoconductive drum surface

If the surface is scratched and the aluminum base is exposed, black spots or streaks will appear on

the copied images. Since those scratches can damage the cleaning blade, replace the drum with a

new one.

(6) Used photoconductive drums

Dispose of the used drums following the regulations regarding industrial waste established by your

local municipal office.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES 3 - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.7 Checking and Cleaning of the Drum Cleaning Blade

(1) Handling Precautions

Since the edge of the cleaning blade performs the cleaning operation, pay attention to the followings:

• Do not hit or rub the blade edge with anything hard.

• Do not rub the edge with a dry cloth or soft pad.

• Do not stain the edge with oil or fingerprints, etc.

• Do not put solvents such as paint thinner or the blade.

• Do not leave lint or dirt on the blade edge.

• Do not put the blade close to a heat source.

(2) Cleaning

Clean the blade edge softly with a cloth soaked in water and afterwards squeezed hard.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 5 e-STUDIO160/200/250 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

Before starting any repair work, strictly obey the following instructions.

CAUTION:

• When replacing parts, be sure to turn the main switch OFF and unplug the power-cord plug

from the outlet.

Notes:

• Be sure to output a dial list and a system function list and keep them until the troubleshooting

is completed so that if the user’s set data is lost it can be re-entered.

• Before turning the main switch OFF, be sure to confirm that the residual memory is 100%

and no memory reception documents exist. If there is such a document , it will be lost if the

service activity requires the battery backup to be unplugged.

• Cover the process unit with a cloth, etc., whenever it is removed from the machine to protect

the photosensitive material from deterioration by exposure to light.

• Be sure to perform each adjustment and setting when replacing the following part.

Main PWA

CCD unit

: Refer to 1.10 MAIN PWA replacement procedure.

: Refer to 1.4.3 Printer unit adjustment and 1.8.5 CCD

unit.

Scanner control PWA

Carriage 1

: Refer to 1.4.3 Scanner unit adjustment.

: Refer to 1.8.3 Adjusting the Carriage 1.

: Refer to 1.8.4 Adjusting the Carriage 2.

: Refer to 1.4.2 Printer unit adjustment and 1.4.4 Printer.

Carriage 2

Laser scanner unit

Original length sensor (RADF) : Automatic sensor adjustment (05-356)

Read sensor (RADF)

: Automatic sensor adjustment (05-356)

Reverse sensor (RADF)

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1 Troubleshooting Based on Error Code

4.1.1 Transporting jam in the main body

E01 Paper jam inside the machine

E02 Paper jam near the fuser unit

When recording paper is left inside the machine, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the

following items should be checked.

Where was the paper stopped?

Before reaching the registration roller

Is the registration roller clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 108)

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path

near the registration roller.

1. Check if each connector between the registration roller clutch and relay PWA (CN37)

is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the registration roller clutch.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

Near the fuser unit

Is the HR drive gear 1 of the fuser unit driven when the main motor is manually rotated

clockwise?

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path

near the fuser unit.

1. Check to see if the gear in the fuser unit is damaged.

2. Check to see if each gear of the main drive gear assembly is damaged.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Near the exit unit (ADU is not installed)

Is the exit roller of the exit unit driven when the main motor is manually rotated clockwise?

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the paper path in the exit

unit.

1. Check to see if the gear in the exit unit is damaged.

2. Check to see if each gear of the main drive gear assembly is damaged.

Near the exit unit (ADU is installed)

Do the gears of the drive gear assembly rotate when the ADU motor (Upper) is driven in

the forward direction? (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 223)

1. Check if the gears of the drive gear assembly are damaged.

2. Check if the connector of the ADU motor (upper) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the ADU PWA and the PFC PWA is

disconnected.

4. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA and the relay PWA is

disconnected.

5. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

6. Check if any conductor pattern on the ADU, PFC, relay and main PWA

is open- or short-circuited.

7. Replace the ADU motor (Upper).

8. Replace the ADU PWA.

9. Replace the PFC PWA.

10. Replace the relay PWA.

11. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 3

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

YES

Is the exit sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 6 Bit 3)

1. Check if each connector between the exit sensor and relay PWA (CN45)

is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

4. Replace the exit sensor.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

Near the JSP

Is the JSP paper jam sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 9

Bit 4)

1. Check if each connector between the JSP paper jam sensor and the

JSP PWA (CN262) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the JSP PWA (CN260) and the relay

PWA (CN41) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the JSP, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the JSP paper jam sensor.

6. Replace the JSP PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Near the OCT

Is the OCT paper feed sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 9

Bit 4)

1. Check if each connector between the OCT paper feed sensor and the

OCT PWA (CN262) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the JSP PWA (CN260) and the relay

PWA (CN41) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the OCT paper feed sensor.

6. Replace the OCT PWA.

7. Replace the Relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

E03 Paper remaining inside the machine at power ON

When recording paper is left inside the machine, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, refer

to E01 , E02 and E11 to E19 .

E08 Transporting jam inside the ADU

If recording paper is left in the ADU, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following items

should be checked.

Do the gears of the drive gear assembly rotate when the ADU motor (Upper) is driven in the

reverse direction? (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 224)

1.Replace the ADU PWA.

2.Replace the PFC PWA.

3.Replace the relay PWA.

4.Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

YES

Is the ADU paper jam sensor (Upper) working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No.

19 Bit 2)

1. Check if each connector between the ADU paper jam sensor (upper) and the

ADU PWA (CN214) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the ADU PWA (CN211) and the PFC PWA

(CN203) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the ADU, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the ADU paper jam sensor (Upper).

7. Replace the ADU PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the ADU paper jam sensor (Lower) working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No.

19 Bit 1)

1. Check if each connector between the ADU paper jam sensor (lower) and the

ADU PWA (CN213) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the ADU PWA (CN211) and the PFC PWA

(CN203) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the ADU, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the ADU paper jam sensor (Lower).

7. Replace the ADU PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the paper path in the ADU.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.2 Paper feeding jam

E11 Paper feeding jam at the ADU

If recording paper is left in the ADU, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following items

should be checked.

1. Check to see if the pinch roller or feed roller in the ADU is damaged.

2. Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path in the ADU.

E12 Paper feeding jam at the SFB

When recording paper is left inside the SFB, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the follow-

ing items should be checked.

Is the SFB feed sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 11 bit 0)

1. Check if each connector between the SFB feed sensor and the relay PWA

(CN43) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the SFB feed sensor.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the SFB clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 204)

1. Check if each connector between the SFB clutch and the relay PWA (CN43) is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the SFB clutch.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check to see if the gears and belt which convey the power of the main motor to the SFB

pickup roller, are damaged.

2. Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles in the paper transport path from the SFB feed

section up to the registration roller.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E13 Tray 1 feeding jam

When recording paper is left on the recording paper path, remove it. If this error occurs fre-

quently, the following items should be checked.

Where was the paper stopped?

Near the registration roller

Is the feed sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 6 Bit 2)

1. Check if each connector between the feed sensor and the relay PWA

(CN33) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

4. Replace the feed sensor.

5. Replace the Relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

Before reaching the pickup feed roller

Is the pickup clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 201)

1. Check if each connector between the pickup clutch and the relay PWA

(CN37) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

4. Replace the pickup clutch.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Activate the pickup clutch. (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 201)

Do the pickup and pickup feed rollers rotate when the main motor is driven? (using test

mode 10, Output Test, CODE 101)

1. Check to see if each gear of the main drive gear assembly is damaged.

2. Check to see if each pulley or the timing belt of the pickup assembly is

damaged.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E14 Tray 2 feeding jam

When recording paper is left on the recording paper path, remove it. If this error occurs fre-

quently, the following items should be checked.

Where was the paper stopped?

Near the registration roller

Is the 2nd feed roller sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 20

Bit 6)

1. Check if each connector between the 2nd feed roller sensor and the

PFC PWA (CN205) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the 2nd feed roller sensor.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

Before reaching the 2nd feed roller

Is the 2nd feed roller clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 203)

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 9

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Check if each connector between the 2nd feed roller clutch and the PFC

PWA (CN205) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the 2nd feed roller clutch.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the Relay PWA.

YES

8. Replace the main PWA.

Is the PFU pickup clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 202)

1. Check if each connector between the PFU pickup clutch and the PFC

PWA (CN208) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the PFU pickup clutch.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Activate the PFU pickup clutch. (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 202)

Do the pickup and pickup feed rollers of the PFU rotate when the main motor is driven?

(using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 101)

1. Check to see if each gear of the main drive gear assembly is damaged.

2. Check to see if each pulley or the timing belt of the PFU pickup assem-

bly is damaged.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 10

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E15 Tray 3 feeding jam

E19 LCF feeding jam

When recording paper is left on the recording path, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the

following items should be checked.

Is the PFP paper feed sensor (Upper) working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA

No.17 Bit 4)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP paper feed sensor (Upper) and the

PFP PWA (CN243) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP paper feed sensor (Upper).

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Activate the PFP pickup clutch. (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 226)

Do the pickup and pickup feed rollers installed on the upper side of the PFP rotate when the PFP

main motor is driven? (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 109)

1. Check to see if the gears and belt which convey the power of the PFP main

motor to the PFP pickup clutch, are damaged.

2. Check to see if each pulley or the timing belt of the PFP pickup assembly is

damaged.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 11

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E16 Tray 4 feeding jam

When recording paper is left on the recording path, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the

following items should be checked.

Is the PFP paper feed sensor (Lower) working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA

No.18 Bit 4)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP paper feed sensor (Lower) and the

PFP PWA (CN243) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP paper feed sensor (Lower).

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Activate the CM pickup clutch. (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 227)

Do the pickup and pickup feed rollers, which are installed on the lower side of the PFP rotate

when the PFP main motor is driven? (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 109)

1. Check to see if the gears and belt which convey the power of the PFP main

motor to the CM pickup clutch, are damaged.

2. Check to see if each pulley or the timing belt of the PFP pickup assembly is

damaged.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 12

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.3 Transporting jam for the optional trays

E31 Paper not reach to feed sensor from tray 2

E32 Paper not reach to feed sensor from tray 3/4

E33 Paper not reach to feed sensor from LCF

When recording paper is left on the recording paper path, remove it. If this error occurs fre-

quently, the following items should be checked.

Is the feed sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 6 Bit 2)

1. Check if each connector between the feed sensor and the relay PWA (CN33) is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3 Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the feed sensor.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 13

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E34 Paper not reach to option cassette feed sensor from tray 3/4

E36 Paper not reach to option cassette feed sensor from LCF

When recording paper is left on the recording path, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the

following items should be checked.

Where was the paper stopped?

Near the registration roller

Is the 2nd feed roller sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 20

Bit 6)

1. Check if each connector between the 2nd feed roller sensor and the

PFC PWA (CN205) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the 2nd feed roller sensor.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

Before reaching the 2nd feed roller

Is the 2nd feed roller clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 203)

1. Check if each connector between the 2nd feed roller clutch and the

PFC PWA (CN205) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the 2nd feed roller clutch.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 14

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Near the PFP upper transport roller

Is the PFP clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 225)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP clutch and the PFP PWA

(CN244) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC

PWA (CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay

PWA (CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA

is open- or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP clutch.

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 15

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E35 Paper not reach to PFP paper feed sensor (upper) from tray 4

Is the PFP paper feed sensor (upper) working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA

No.17 Bit 4)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP paper feed sensor (upper) and the

PFP PWA (CN243) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP paper feed sensor (upper).

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the PFP clutch working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 225)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP clutch and the PFP PWA (CN244) is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP clutch.

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 16

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

YES

Activate the PFP clutch. (using test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 225)

Does the PFP upper transport roller rotate when the PFP main motor is driven? (using test

mode 10, Output Test, CODE 109)

Check to see if the gears and belt which convey the power of the PFP main motor

to the PFP upper transport roller, are damaged.

YES

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the recording paper path.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 17

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.4 Paper jam if some cover is opened

E41 Front cover or side cover is opened during copying

Is the front cover or side cover opened?

YES

Close the front cover or side cover.

Is the front cover switch working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 7 Bit 2)

1. Check if the connector CN52 on the relay PWA is unplugged.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the front cover switch.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the interlock switch for the side cover working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA

No. 6 Bit 1)

1. Check if the connector CN5 on the PSU is unplugged.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay PWA and PSU is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the side cover switch.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the PSU.

YES

Check to see if the front cover switch or the interlock switch is properly attached.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 18

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E42 PFU side door is opened during copying

Is the PFU side cover opened?

Close PFU side cover.

YES

Is the PFU cover open switch working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 16 Bit 2)

1. Check if each connector between the PFU cover open switch and the PFC

PWA (CN208) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

5. Replace the PFU cover open switch.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if the PFU cover open switch is properly attached.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 19

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E43 ADU is opened during copying

Is the ADU mounted securely on the copier?

Mount the ADU securely to the copier.

YES

Is the ADU cover open switch working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 19 Bit 3)

1. Check if each connector between the ADU cover open switch and the ADU

PWA (CN217) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the ADU PWA (CN211) and the PFC PWA

(CN203) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201) and the relay PWA

(CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the ADU, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the ADU cover open switch.

7. Replace the ADU PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Check to see if the ADU cover open switch is properly attached.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 20

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E45 Side cover of LCF opened during printing

Is the LCF side cover open?

YES

Remove paper if there is any. Close the cover.

Is the LCF side cover open switch working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 18

Bit4)

1. Check the connector of the LCF side cover open switch for disconnection.

2. Check the connectors CN100 and CN106 on the LCF PWA for disconnection.

3. Check the connector CN206 on the PFC PWA for disconnection.

4. Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harnesses for breaks.

5. Check the LCF PWA and PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

6. Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.

7. Replace the LCF PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

YES

1. Replace the LCF side cover open switch.

2. Replace the LCF PWA.

3. Replace the PFC PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 21

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.5 Paper transporting jam at the ADF

E71 Original feeding jam at the feeding area of the ADF

When original is left inside the ADF, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following items

should be checked.

[Two or more originals are fed simultaneously.]

Have too many originals been placed?

YES

Reset the originals, following the specification.

Are the original sheets curled or folded too much?

YES

Flatten and reset the originals.

Are different-size originals placed together?

YES

Set only one-size originals.

Is the separation pad stained?

YES

Clean the separation pad.

[The original does not reach the feed roller.]

Does the paper thickness satisfy the specifications?

Reset the originals, following the specification.

YES

Is the pickup roller or feed roller stained?

YES

Clean the roller.

Is the transporting force of the pickup roller or the feed roller insufficient?

YES

Replace the rollers.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 22

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E72 Original transporting jam at the transporting area of the ADF

E73 Original exiting at the exiting area of the ADF

When original is left inside the ADF, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following items

should be checked.

Is the read roller dirty?

YES

Clean the roller.

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the original path.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 23

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.6 Paper transporting jam at the RADF

E71 Original feeding jam at the feeding area of RADF

When original is left inside the RADF, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following

items should be checked.

[Two or more originals are fed simultaneously.]

Have too many originals been placed?

YES

Reset the originals, following the specification.

Are the original sheets curled or folded too much?

YES

Flatten and reset the originals.

Are different-size originals placed together?

YES

Set only one-size originals.

Is the separation roller stained?

YES

Clean the separation roller.

[The original does not reach the feed roller.]

Does the paper thickness satisfy the specifications?

Reset the originals, following the specification.

YES

Is the pickup roller, feed roller or separation roller stained?

YES

Clean the roller.

Is the transporting force of the pickup roller, feed roller or separation roller insufficient?

YES

Replace the rollers.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 24

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E72 Original transporting jam at transporting area of the RADF.

E73 Original exiting at the exiting area of RADF.

When original is left inside the RADF, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the following items

should be checked.

Is the aligning roller, lead roller or exit roller dirty?

YES

Clean the roller.

Check to see if there are any foreign obstacles on the original path.

E74 Original reversing jam

When recording paper is left inside the machine, remove it. If this error occurs frequently, the

following items should be checked.

Are the lead roller and reverse roller dirty?

YES

Clean the rollers.

Is the reverse flapper working properly?

YES

Check to see if there any foreign obstacles on the original path.

Adjust the reverse solenoid.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 25

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.7 Paper jam in finisher

EA1 Finisher paper transport delay jam

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and inlet paper sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)

1. Connect the connector of the inlet paper sensor securely.

2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.

3. Replace the inlet paper sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

EA2 Finisher paper transport stop jam

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and inlet paper sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)

1. Connect the connector of the inlet paper sensor securely.

2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.

3. Replace the inlet paper sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 26

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EA3 Paper remaining in finisher at power ON

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and inlet paper sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)

1. Connect the connector of the inlet paper sensor securely.

2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.

3. Replace the inlet paper sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

EA4 Finisher front cover opened during printing

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the finisher connected to the main unit?

Connect the finisher to the main unit.

YES

Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and finisher joint sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the inlet paper sensor working properly?

1. Connect the connector of the finisher joint sensor securely.

2. Replace the finisher joint sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 27

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EA5 Finisher stapling jam

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit or on the stapling tray?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple

sheet which was slid out of the staple case?

YES

End

Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and stapling home position sensor bro-

ken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?

1. Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.

2. Replace the stapling home position sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

EA6 Finisher early arrival jam

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and inlet paper sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)

1. Connect the connector of the inlet paper sensor securely.

2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.

3. Replace the paper inlet sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 28

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EA7 Stack transport jam before stapling

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and stack delivery lever home position

sensor broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?

1. Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor securely.

2. Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

EAF Stapled stack transport jam

Is there paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or main unit?

YES

Remove the paper.

Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PWA disconnected?

Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PWA and returning roller home position sensor

broken?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?

1. Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor securely.

2. Replace the returning roller home position sensor.

YES

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 29

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.8 Drive system service call

C01 Abnormal operation of the main motor

1. Check if each connector between the main motor (CN1, CN2) and the relay PWA (CN29,

CN28) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the relay PWA (CN21) and the main PWA (CN15) is dis-

connected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the main motor, relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

5. Replace the main motor.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 30

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C04 Abnormal operation of the PFP main motor

Is the PFP main motor working? (using the test mode 10. Output Test, CODE 109)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP main motor (CN1, CN2) and the

PFP PWA (CN246) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241, CN242) and the PFC

PWA (CN206, CN207) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP main motor, PFP, PFC, relay and

main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP main motor.

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the LED on the PFP main motor lit continuously?

1. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

2. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP main motor, PFP and PFC PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

3. Replace the PFP main motor.

4. Replace the PFP PWA.

5. Replace the PFC PWA.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Does the PLL lock signal CN246-8 on the PFP PWA continuously display ‘L’?

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP and PFC PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

2. Replace the PFP PWA.

3. Replace the PFC PWA.

4. Replace the relay PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 31

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C06 Abnormal operation of the LCF transport motor

Is the LCF transport motor working? (using the test mode 10. Output Test, CODE 270)

1. Check if each connector between the LCF transport motor (CN1) and the LCF

PWA (CN102) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the LCF PWA (CN100, CN101) and the PFC

PWA (CN206, CN207) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the LCF transport motor, LCF, PFC, relay

and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

6. Replace the LCF transport motor.

7. Replace the LCF PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Does the PLL lock signal CN102-3 on the LCF PWA continuously display ‘L’?

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LCF and PFC PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

2. Replace the LCF PWA.

3. Replace the PFC PWA.

4. Replace the relay PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC PW

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 32

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.9 Temporary paper supply mechanism service call

C13 Abnormal operation of the paper tray in the main body

Does the tray move up? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 242)

1. Check if each connector between the tray-up assembly and the relay PWA

(CN37) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the tray-up motor of the tray-up assembly.

5. Replace the relay PWA.

6. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the pickup sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 7 Bit 0)

1. Check if each connector between the pickup sensor and the relay PWA (CN37)

is disconnected.

2. Check if the slit reaches the pickup sensor.

3. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

5. Replace the pickup sensor.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 33

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C14 Abnormal operation of the 2nd tray

Does the PFU tray move up? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 243)

1. Check if each connector between the PFU tray-up assembly and the PFC PWA

(CN208) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

5. Replace the PFU tray-up motor of the tray-up assembly.

6. Replace the PFC PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the PFU pickup sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 16 Bit 0)

1. Check if each connector between the PFU pickup sensor and the PFC PWA

(CN208) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

3. Check if the slit reaches the PFU pickup sensor.

4. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC, relay and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFU pickup sensor.

7. Replace the PFC PWA.

8. Replace the relay PWA.

9. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 34

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C15 Abnormal operation of the 3rd tray in the PFP

Does the PFP tray (upper) move up? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 275)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP tray-up assembly (upper) and the

PFP PWA (CN244) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241, CN242) and the PFC

PWA (CN206, CN207) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP tray-up motor of the PFP tray-up assembly (upper).

7. Replace the PFP PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

9. Replace the relay PWA.

10.Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the PFP pickup sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 17 Bit 0)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP pickup sensor and the PFP PWA

(CN247) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if the slit reaches the PFP pickup sensor.

5. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

6. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

7. Replace the PFP pickup sensor.

8. Replace the PFP PWA.

9. Replace the PFC PWA.

10.Replace the relay PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 35

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C16 Abnormal operation of the 4th tray in the PFP

Does the PFP tray (lower) move up? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 276)

1. Check if each connector between the PFP tray-up assembly (lower) and the

PFP PWA (CN244) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241, CN242) and the PFC

PWA (CN206, CN207) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

6. Replace the PFP tray-up motor of the PFP tray-up assembly (lower).

7. Replace the PFC PWA.

8. Replace the relay PWA.

9. Replace the main PWA.

YES

Is the CM pickup sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No.18

Bit 0)

1. Check if each connector between the CM pickup sensor and the PFP PWA

(CN248) is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the PFP PWA (CN241) and the PFC PWA

(CN206) is disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the PFC PWA (CN201, CN202) and the relay

PWA (CN35, CN36) is disconnected.

4. Check if the slit reaches the CM pickup sensor.

5. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

6. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFP, PFC, relay and main PWA is open-

or short-circuited.

7. Replace the CM pickup sensor.

8. Replace the PFP PWA.

9. Replace the PFC PWA.

10.Replace the relay PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 36

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C18 LCF tray-up motor is abnormal

Does the LCF tray move ? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE271.)

1. Check the connector of the LCF tray-up motor for disconnection.

2. Check the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF PWA for discon-

nection.

3. Check the connector CN206 on the PFC PWA for disconnection.

4. Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harnesses for breaks.

5. Check the LCF PWA and PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

6. Replace the LCF PWA.

7. Replace the PFC PWA.

YES

Is the LCF tray-up sensor working? (using the test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA No. 18 Bit 2.)

1. Check the connector of the LCF tray-up sensor for disconnection.

2. Check the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF PWA for discon-

nection.

3. Check the connector CN206 on the PFC PWA for disconnection.

4. Check if the slit reaches the LCF tray-up sensor.

5. Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harnesses for breaks.

6. Check the LCF PWA and PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

7. Replace the LCF tray-up sensor.

8. Replace the LCF PWA.

9. Replace the PFC PWA.

YES

1. Check the PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 37

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C19 LCF end fence motor is abnormal

Is the end fence working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE268.)

1. Check the connector of the LCF end fence motor for disconnection.

2. Check the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF PWA for discon-

nection.

3. Check the connector CN206 on the PFC PWA for disconnection.

4. Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harnesses for breaks.

5. Check the LCF PWA and PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

6. Replace the end fence motor.

7. Replace the LCF PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

YES

Are the end fence stop position sensor and end fence home position sensor working? (using the

test mode 04, Sensor Test, DATA 18 Bit 6 & 7.)

1. Check the connector of the sensor for disconnection.

2. Check the connectors CN100 and CN107 on the LCF PWA for disconnection.

3. Check the connector CN206 on the PFC PWA for disconnection.

4. Check if the slit reaches the sensor.

5. Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harnesses for breaks.

6. Check the LCF PWA and PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

7. Replace the LCF PWA.

8. Replace the PFC PWA.

YES

1. Check the PFC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

2. Replace the PFC PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 38

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.10 Optical system service call

C21 Carriage initialization error

Is the wire or belt inside the scanner unit broken? Does the wire or belt inside the scanner unit

unfasten?

YES

Replace the wire or belt.

When the original glass is removed and the carriage is moved to the center, does the drive

system operate abnormally, such as racing or getting stuck?

YES

Repair or replace the drive system.

Does the carriage move to the home position when the power is turned on?

YES

1. Check if the home position sensor is not properly installed.

2. Check if the connector of the home position sensor is disconnected.

3. Check if the connector pin is removed or the harness is disconnected.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the scanner control PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

5. Replace the home position sensor.

6. Replace the scanner control PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

1. Check if the scanner motor cable is damaged, short-circuited, or the connector pin is re-

moved.

2. Check if any conductor pattern on the scanner control PWA is open- or short-circuited.

3. Replace the scanner motor.

4. Replace the scanner control PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 39

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C25 Scanner unit watch dog error

This error occurs when the watchdog register fails to be cleared within every certain time inter-

val on the scanner control PWA (occurrence of a watchdog interrupt).

If C25 still occurs even after the power is turned off and then on, replace the scanner control

PWA.

C26 Peak detection error

Does the lamp light up during initialization after the power is turned on?

NO (=The lamp does not light)

1. Check if the connector of the lamp is disconnected, or the harness is broken.

2. Check if the connector of the inverter is disconnected, or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the inverter and scanner control PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the lamp.

5. Replace the inverter.

6. Replace the scanner control PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

YES (=The lamp lights)

1. Check if the shading plate behind the document scale is dirty.

2. Check if the lens can be seen when looking the first carriage from the top.

3. Check if the optical system is extremely dirty or damaged.

4. Check if the FFC of the CCD PWA is disconnected.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the CCD and scanner control PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

6. Replace the CCD unit.

7. Replace the scanner control PWA.

8. Replace the relay PWA.

9. Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 40

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.11 Process system service call

C38 Replaced process unit error

Replace the relay PWA.

Replace the main PWA.

4.1.12 Fuser system service call

C41 Abnormality of the thermistor or heater disconnection when the power is turned on

Note: To prevent the danger, the following 1 and 2 should be done after the power-cord plug is un-

plugged.

1. Check the thermistor.

(1) Is the connector between the heater thermistor 1/2 and the relay PWA (CN44) disconnected?

(2) Is the harness of the heater thermistor 1/2 broken?

(3) Is the connector pin removed?

(4) Does the heater thermistor 1/2 connect to the heat roller firmly?

2. Check the heater lamp

(1) Is the heater lamp broken?

(2) Is the connector between the heater lamp and the PSU (CN3) disconnected?

(3) Is the heater thermostat open?

(4) Is the switching power supply broken?

3. Check the relay PWA.

(1) Is the connector CN44 disconnected?

(2) Is the connector pin removed?

(3) Is there a circuit abnormality, such as open or short circuit?

(4) Replace the relay PWA.

4. Reset the status counter

(1) The following processes are carried out after completing repair of the cause for the C41 error

message.

(2) Press the [0] and [8] keys simultaneously to turn on the power.

(3) Input 400 using the numeric keys, and press the start key.

(4) Change the displayed status counter from [2] to [0], and press the SET key (Reset C41).

(5) Turn the power on again, and check that it returns to the normal standby mode.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 41

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C43 Thermistor abnormal

C44 Heater disconnection

1 - 3 is the same check as for the C41.

With 4, the displayed status counter for the C43 is [4] or [6], and the displayed status counter for

the C44 is [5], [7], or [9] so change these displayed status counters to [0] using the same

procedure as for C41.

C45 Thermistor 2 abnormality

1. Check the thermistor 2

(1) Is the connector between the heater thermistor 2 and the relay PWA (CN44) disconnected?

(2) Is the harness of the heater thermistor 2 broken?

(3) Is the connector pin removed?

(4) Does the heater thermistor 2 connect to the heat roller firmly?

2. Check the relay PWA

(1) Is the connector CN44 disconnected?

(2) Is the connector pin removed?

(3) Is there a circuit abnormality, such as open or short circuit?

(4) Replace the relay PWA.

3. Reset the status counter

Change the status counter from 8 to 0 using the same procedure as for C41.

4.1.13 Communications system service call

C56 Communications error between the PFC and the CPU on the main PWA

1. Check if the connector CN36 or CN35 on the relay PWA is disconnected.

2. Check if any conductor pattern (PFRXD, PFREQ, PFACK, MACK/PF, PFTXD, or MREQ/PF

between the IC, IC2 and CN36) on the relay PWA is open- or short-circuited.

3. Replace the relay PWA.

4. Replace the PFC PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 42

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C57 Communication error between the IPC PWA and the CPU on the main PWA

1. Check the circuit patterns on the main PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

2. Check the IPC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

3. Replace the IPC PWA.

4. Replace the main PWA.

C58 Communication error between the IPC PWA and the finisher

1. Check if the specified finisher is attached.

2. Check the IPC PWA for short-circuits and breaks.

3. Check if the pin of the connector being connected to the connector J2 on the IPC PWA is

disconnected or the harness is breaking.

4. Check if the fuse F3 of the power supply unit is blown.

5. Check the control PWA in the finisher for short-circuits and breaks.

6. Check the connections between the finisher and copier if the connector pins are discon-

nected, or the harnesses are breaking.

7. Replace the IPC PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 43

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.14 ADF or RADF system service call

C71 RADF DC motor lock error

Is the RADF DC motor working (forward/reverse)? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE

281/282)

1. Check if each connector between the RADF DC motor and the RADF PWA is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between RADF PWA and the scanner control PWA is

disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA and the main PWA

is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF, scanner control and main PWA is

open- or short-circuited.

6. Replace the RADF DC motor.

7. Replace the RADF PWA.

8. Replace the scanner control PWA.

9. Replace the main PWA.

YES

1. Check if the RADF DC motor pulley is mounted to the axis of the RADF DC motor and

rotates properly.

2. Check if any foreign obstacles are on the detection slit of the RADF DC motor pulley. Re-

move such foreign obstacles, if any.

3. Check if any foreign obstacles blocking the slit of the RADF DC motor sensor. Remove such

foreign obstacles, if any.

4. Replace the RADF DC motor pulley.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 44

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C73 RADF EEPROM initialization error

1. Check if any conductor pattern (IC12 and surrounding area) on the RADF PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

2. Replace the RADF PWA.

C74 RADF SB sensor adjustment error

1. Check there are any foreign obstacles between the sensor and the reflection mirror.

2. Check if the sensor or mirror is dirty.

3. Check if each connector between the RADF SB sensor and the RADF PWA (CN4) is discon-

nected.

4. Check if each connector between the RADF PWA and the scanner control PWA (CN6) is

disconnected.

5. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN4) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

6. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

7. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF, scanner control and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

8. Replace the RADF SB sensor.

9. Replace the RADF PWA.

10.Replace the scanner control PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

C81 RADF fan motor error

Is the motor working? (using the test mode 10, Output Test, CODE 298)

YES

Check for foreign obstacles on the blade and remove if any.

1. Check if each connector between the RADF FAN motor and the RADF PWA (CN9) is discon-

nected.

2. Check if each connector between the RADF PWA and the scanner control PWA (CN6) is

disconnected.

3. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN4) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

5. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF, scanner control and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

6. Replace the RADF FAN motor sensor.

7. Replace the RADF PWA.

8. Replace the scanner control PWA.

9. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 45

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C82 Read Sensor Adjustment Error (ADF/RADF)

(ADF)

1. Check there are any foreign obstacles between the read sensor and the reflection mirror.

2. Check if the read sensor or reflection mirror is dirty.

3. Check if each connector between the read sensor and the ADF PWA (CN4) is disconnected.

4. Check if each connector between the ADF PWA (CN1) and the scanner control PWA (CN6)

is disconnected.

5. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN4) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

6. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

7. Check if any conductor pattern on the ADF, scanner control and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

8. Replace the read sensor.

9. Replace the ADF PWA.

10.Replace the scanner control PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

(RADF)

1. Check there are any foreign obstacles between the read sensor and the reflection mirror.

2. Check if the read sensor or reflection mirror is dirty.

3. Check if each connector between the read sensor and the RADF PWA (CN6) is discon-

nected.

4. Check if each connector between the RADF PWA and the scanner control PWA (CN6) is

disconnected.

5. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN4) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

6. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

7. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF, scanner control and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

8. Replace the read sensor.

9. Replace the RADF PWA.

10.Replace the scanner control PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 46

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C83 Original length sensor adjustment error

1. Check there are any foreign obstacles between the original length sensor and the reflection

mirror.

2. Check if the original sensor or reflection mirror is dirty.

3. Check if each connector between the original length sensor and the RADF PWA (CN3) is

disconnected.

4. Check if each connector between the RADF PWA and the scanner control PWA (CN6) is

disconnected.

5. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN4) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

6. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

7. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF, scanner control and main PWA is open- or

short-circuited.

8. Replace the original length sensor.

9. Replace the RADF PWA.

10.Replace the scanner control PWA.

11.Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 47

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.15 Other abnormal service call

C91 SRAM abnormality

1. Turn the main switch OFF. Perform the RAM clear ([1] [3] [*] + ON).

2. If C91 appears again after the RAM clear, go to step 3.

3. Confirm that the J1 short pin on the main PWA is inserted properly into the pin 1 side.

4. When the power is off, check that the voltage of the lithium battery (SY1) is 2.4V or more.

5. When the power is off, check that the SRAM backup voltage is 2.0V or more.

(Between IC58 or pin 14 (GND) of IC74 and pin 28 (+5VB))

6. Replace the lithium battery (SY1).

7. Replace the main PWA.

C95 Power supply unit fan motor abnormality

1. Check if each connector between the power supply unit fan motor and the relay PWA (CN50)

is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the relay PWA (CN21) and the main PWA (CN15) is dis-

connected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the power supply unit fan motor.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

C96 Process unit fan motor abnormality

1. Check if each connector between the process unit fan motor and the relay PWA (CN50) is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the relay PWA (CN21) and the main PWA (CN15) is dis-

connected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the process unit fan motor.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 48

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C97 Vacuum fan motor abnormality

1. Check if each connector between the paper guide assembly and the relay PWA (CN34) is

disconnected.

2. Check if each connector between the relay PWA (CN21) and the main PWA (CN15) is dis-

connected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the paper guide assembly.

6. Replace the relay PWA.

7. Replace the main PWA.

C98 Clock IC abnormality

Is the service call generated even if the switch of the body is turned off and on again?

Be left as it is for a while.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the main PWA (IC75 and surrounding area) is open- or

short-circuited.

2. Replace the main PWA if the problem seems to happen frequently.

C99 PFC microcomputer abnormality

Is the service call generated even if the switch of the body is turned on again?

Be left as it is for a while.

YES

1. Check if any conductor pattern on the PFC PWA is open- or short-circuited.

2. Replace the PFC microcomputer or the PFC PWA if it seems to happen frequently.

4.1.16 Laser optical system service call

CA1 Polygon motor abnormality

1. Check if each connector between the laser scanner unit and the relay PWA (CN26) is dis-

connected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the relay PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

6. Replace the laser scanner unit.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 49

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CA2 HSYNC abnormality

1. Check if each connector between the laser scanner unit and the main PWA (CN18) is dis-

connected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the main PWA.

5. Replace the laser scanner unit.

4.1.17 Finisher related service call

CB2 Delivery motor is abnormal

Rotate the delivery motor by hand. Does it rotates smoothly?

Correct the mechanism.

YES

Is the delivery motor clock sensor working normally?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Is the voltage between J4 -5 and -6 on the finisher controller PWA 24V when the delivery motor

is rotating?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

Is the harness connecting the motor and the controller PWA open- or short-circuited?

YES

Replace the harness.

Replace the motor.

CB5 Staple motor is abnormal

Is the harness connecting the stapler and the finisher controller PWA open- or short-circuited?

YES

Replace the harness.

Is the problem solved by replacing the stapler?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

END

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 50

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CC8 Front jogging motor is abnormal

Is the front jogging plate home position sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Is the wiring between the finisher controller PWA and front jogging motor correct?

Correct the wiring.

YES

Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?

YES

Fix it.

Is the problem solved by replacing the front jogging motor?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

END

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 51

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CC9 Upper stack tray lift motor is abnormal

Is the wiring between the finisher controller PWA and upper stack tray lift motor correct?

Correct the wiring.

YES

Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?

Level them.

YES

Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Is the stack tray paper height sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor and lower stack tray full sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor or sensor controller PWA.

YES

Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher control PWA 24V when the

upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PWA. If there is

no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 52

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CCA Lower stack tray lift motor is abnormal

Is the wiring between the finisher controller PWA and lower stack tray lift motor correct?

Correct the wiring.

YES

Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?

Level them.

YES

Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Is the stack tray paper height sensor working properly.

Replace the sensor.

YES

Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor and lower stack tray lower limit sensor working

properly?

Replace the sensor or sensor controller PWA.

YES

Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PWA become 24V

when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

Check the wiring between the upper stack lift motor and finisher controller PWA. If there is no

problem, replace the lower stack tray lift motor.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 53

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CCB Rear jogging motor is abnormal

Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor working properly?

Replace the sensor.

YES

Is the wiring between the finisher controller PWA and rear jogging motor correct?

Correct the wiring.

YES

Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?

YES

Fix it.

Is the problem solved by replacing the rear jogging motor?

Replace the finisher controller PWA.

YES

END

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 54

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.18 Scanner related service call

F11 Scanner I/F error

1. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN6) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the scanner control and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the scanner control PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

F12 Scanner unit program download write error

F13 Scanner unit program download sector error

1. Check if the recovery ROM PWA is firmly connected to the scanner control PWA (CN3).

2. Check if the connector pin is removed.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the scanner control PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the scanner control PWA.

F14 Scanner unit FROM error

Was the main PWA replaced?

YES

Download the scanner total count value into the main PWA in the setting mode (08-

388).

Was the scanner unit or scanner control PWA replaced?

YES

Download the scanner total counter value of the main PWA into the scanner con-

trol PWA in the setting mode (08-389).

1. Check if each connector between the scanner control PWA (CN6) and the main PWA (CN8)

is disconnected.

2. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the scanner control and main PWA is open- or short-

circuited.

4. Replace the scanner control PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 55

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.19 Printer related service call

F21 Printer PWA memory error

1. Check if the printer PWA is firmly connected to the main PWA (CN5).

2. Check if the connector pin is removed.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the main PWA

F22 Printer PWA NV-RAM error

Replace the Printer PWA.

4.1.20 Fax related service call

F31 Modem IC abnormality

1. Check if the Fax PWA is firmly connected to the main PWA (CN6).

2. Check if the connector pin is removed.

3. Check if any conductor pattern on the Fax and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

4. Replace the Fax PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 56

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.21 OCT system service call

F41 Initial detection error of the offset tray

1. Check if each connector between the OCT motor and the OCT PWA (CN261) is discon-

nected.

2. Check if each connector between the OCT PWA (CN261) and the relay PWA (CN41) is

disconnected.

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT, relay and main PWA is open- or short-circuited.

5. Replace the OCT motor.

6. Replace the OCT PWA.

7. Replace the relay PWA.

8. Replace the main PWA.

4.1.22 Other service call

Error message “Set process unit” is re-displayed

1. Check if each connector between the relay PWA (CN54) and the DEV. motor assembly

(terminals) is disconnected.

2. Check if the harnesses have been connected to the designated terminals of DEV. motor

assembly correctly. (Refer to Chapter 12.6 of the Service Manual)

3. Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.

4. Replace the relay PWA.

5. Replace the main PWA.

Error message “Broken Registration” is re-displayed

This error occurs when an error is found on the phonebook data stored in the flash ROM (IC50) on the

main PWB or the machine is failed to read the phonebook data correctly.

1. Turn the main switch OFF. Perform the RAM clear ([1] [3] [*] + ON).

Warning: Before performing the RAM clear, press the [CLEAR/STOP] key to clear the error

and print out the TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST, FUNCTION LIST, and FUNCTION

LIST FOR MAINTENANCE.

2. Set the functions and program the dial numbers according to the list printed out.

3. If the error persists, replace the main PWA.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 57

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.2 Troubleshooting of Image

(1) Uneven pitch and blur

Condition

Location

Phenomenon

Uneven pitch

Feeding

direction

All modes Occurs cyclically at right angles to

paper feeding direction

Cause

Defect area

—

Step

Main-Classification

—

Sub-Classification

—

Specific-Classification

—

Abnormal paper

transport speed

Paper transport speed in Low speed

registration section

Registration roller aging

change

Low speed

Registration roller life

worn out

Drum drive system

Drum

Surface condition

—

Damage

Attached foreign matter

—

Main drive gear assembly Installation condition

Drum Drive Gear

Polygonal mirror

Damaged

—

Deformation

Surface inclined

Laser scanner unit

Deformation

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 58

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Check item

Criteria

Measures

—

Output built-in halftone

pattern on A3/LD.

(Code 109)

Perform following procedures from 2 and

after.

—

Clean rubber roller. Surface with alcohol

or replace it with new one.

Check condition of

registration rubber roller

surface.

Does the roller surface lack in friction and Replace registration roller.

is it slippery?

Check pattern.

Uneven pitch approx. 94 mm overall?

Is there damage?

—

Check drum surface.

Check pattern.

Replace process unit or drum.

Clean drum, replace process unit or drum.

Reinstall main drive gear assembly prop-

erly.

Is there any attached foreign matter?

Uneven pitch approx. 2.4 mm overall?

Check pattern.

—

Replace drum drive gear.

Replace unit.

—

Uneven pitch approx. 0.3 mm overall?

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 59

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) Blurred image

Step

Cause/Defect area

Paper

Check items

Measures

Paper in cassette or LCF damp? Change paper. Avoid storing paper in damp

place.

Machine installation place Is machine installed on a slant Place machine on flat surface.

surface?

Process unit (developer)

Is toner running short?

Replace toner cartridge.

Check to see that toner empty sensor and

empty detection circuit operate properly.

Clean transfer charger wire.

Transfer charger unit

Transfer charger wire dirty?

Transfer charger wire slacked? Replace transfer charger unit.

Foreign matter such as dust stick- Clean transfer guide roller.

ing to transfer guide roller?

Process unit (drum)

Laser scanner unit

Drum bedewed or dirty?

If problem persists, replace process unit or

drum.

Note: Never touch drum surface.

Foreign matter or dust on lens? Remove foreign matter or dust with blower.

(Do not use a cloth.)

If problem persists after measures Replace the process unit, transfer unit, or la-

are applied, or there is no prob- ser scanner unit.

lem found the above check, fol-

low procedure described in right

column.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 60

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) Blank copy

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Transfer charger unit

Transfer charger unit securely in- Re-install transfer charger unit securely.

stalled?

Transfer charger wire cut off?

Replace transfer charger unit.

Process unit (terminals)

Drum ground terminals/develop- Clean drum ground terminals, developing bias

ing bias terminals and corre- terminals and corresponding terminals of main

sponding terminals of main body body.

stained?

Process unit drive system Is sleeve gear and agitator gear If any is damaged, replace process unit or

driven when main motor is manu- damaged part.

ally rotated clockwise?

Is drum coupling driven when If any is damaged, replace process unit or

main motor is manually rotated damaged part.

clockwise?

Process unit deformation Process unit deformed?

Replace process unit.

Laser scanner unit

Foreign matter or stain on lens? Remove foreign material or stain with blower.

(Do not use a cloth.)

HVPS (transfer charger and High-voltage output defective?

developer bias)

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit, laser scanner unit,

are applied, or there is no prob- HVPS or main PWA.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 61

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(4) Solid copy

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Process unit installation

Process unit

Process unit securely installed? Re-install process unit securely.

Charger wire terminals/grid termi- Clean terminals.

nals (process unit) and corre-

(main charger)

sponding terminals (main body)

stained?

Is there any disconnection in the Replace the process unit or charger wire.

charger wire?

HVPS (main charger)

High-voltage output defective?

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace the process unit, laser scanner unit,

are applied, or there is no prob- HVPS, or main PWA.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 62

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5) White banding (in feeding direction)

Step

Cause/Defect area

Paper feed path

Check items

Measures

Does toner image touch foreign Remove the foreign matter.

matter after separation, before

entering fuser unit.

Laser scanner unit

Foreign matter or dust on lens? Remove the foreign matter or dust with blower.

(Do not use a cloth.)

Is there a foreign matter blocking Remove the foreign matter.

off laser beam in the path?

Transfer charger unit

Does a foreign material or stain Clean the wire, or remove the foreign matter.

adhere to the transfer wire?

Transfer charger wire slacked?

Replace the transfer charger unit.

Transfer charger case deformed? Replace the transfer charger unit.

White banding on the magnetic Clean the area between the magnetic roller

roller? (Is there a foreign matter and doctor blade with the doctor blade clean-

between the magnetic roller and ing jig.

Process unit

(Magnetic roller)

doctor blade?)

Process unit (Doctor blade) Is the doctor-sleeve gap within the Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap. If the problem

specified value? persists, replace the doctor blade.

Any abnormalities on drum sur- If the problem persists, replace process unit

Process unit (Drum)

face?

or drum.

Note: Never touch drum surface.

If problem persists after measures Replace the process unit, laser scanner unit,

are applied, or there is no prob- or transfer charger unit.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in the right

column.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 63

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(6) White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Process unit (developer)

Developing bias terminals (pro- Clean terminals.

cess unit) and corresponding ter-

minals (main body) stained?

Transfer charger unit

Transfer charger unit securely in- Re-install transfer charger unit securely.

stalled?

Transfer charger wire terminals Clean terminals.

and corresponding terminals

stained?

Is guide roller stained or rotating Clean guide roller.

improperly?

Ground shaft properly.

Guide roller stained or rotating When guide roller rotates improperly, replace

improperly? Guide roller shaft transfer charger unit.

grouded improperly?

Process unit (drum)

Fuser unit

Any abnormalities on drum sur- Replace process unit or drum.

face?

Toner on heat roller surface? Clean heat roller. If problem persists, replace

Scratches on heat roller surface? heat roller.

Check each gear or roller for pa- Replace defective gear or roller.

per feed and transport is dam-

Gear and roller

aged?

HVPS (main charger,

transfer charger and

developer bias)

High-voltage output defective?

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or transfer charger unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 64

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(7) Black banding (in feeding direction)

Step

Cause/Defect area

Scanner

Check items

Measures

Clean slit, lens and mirrors.

Clean charger wire.

Foreign matter in optical path?

Main charger wire stained?

Foreign matter on grid?

Process unit

(main charger)

Remove foreign matter.

Grid dirty or deformed?

Clean grid, replace process unit or grid.

Replace process unit or drum.

Process unit (Drum)

Fuser unit

Scratches on drum surface?

Dirt or scratches on heat roller Clean or replace heat roller?

surface?

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or fuser unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 65

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(8) Black banding (at right angles to feeding direction)

Step

Cause/Defect area

Process unit

Check items

Main charger wire dirty or de- Clean main charger wire, replace process unit

formed? or charger wire.

Measures

(main charger)

Charger wire terminals/grid termi- Clean terminals.

nals (process unit) and corre-

sponding terminals (main body)

stained?

Process unit (Drum)

Fuser unit

Deep scratch on drum surface? Replace process unit or drum.

Dirt or scratches on heat roller Clean or replace heat roller?

surface?

HVPS (main charger/trans- High-voltage output defective?

fer charger)

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or fuser unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 66

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(9) White Spots

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Foreign matter on guide roller?

Guide roller shaft grounded

improperly?

Measures

Clean guide roller.

Transfer charger unit

Ground guide roller shaft properly by apply-

ing conductive oil.

Transfer charger wire slacked? Replace transfer charger unit.

Transfer charger case deformed? Replace transfer charger unit.

Any abnormalities on drum sur- Replace process unit or drum.

face?

Process unit (drum)

Fuser unit

Toner on heat roller surface? Clean heat roller. If problem persists, replace

Scratches on heat roller surface? heat roller.

Process unit (Developer) Is toner running short?

Check to see toner sensor works properly, and

then check toner replenishing procedure.

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

HVPS (main charger/

developer bias/transfer

charger)

High-voltage output defective?

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit, transfer unit, fuser unit,

are applied, or there is no prob- or HVPS.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 67

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(10) Uneven image density

Step

Cause/Defect area

Paper

Check items

Measures

Paper in cassette or LCF damp? Change paper.

Avoid storing paper in damp place.

Foreign matter or dust on lens? Remove foreign matter or dust with blower.

(Do not use a cloth.)

Laser scanner unit

Process unit

Main charger wire stained?

Clean charger wire.

(main charger)

Process unit (developer)

Is toner put in process unit in an Shake process unit horizontally to place toner

unbalanced manner? evenly.

Transfer charger unit

Transfer charger unit securely in- Re-install transfer charger unit securely.

stalled?

Transfer charger wire dirty?

Clean transfer charger wire.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit, transfer charger unit,

are applied, or there is no prob- or laser scanner unit.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 68

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(11) Blotched image

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Paper too thin?

Measures

Paper

Change paper.

Clean case.

Paper too dry?

Transfer charger unit

Transfer charger case dirty?

Transfer charger wire dirty?

Clean wire.

HVPS (transfer/separation High-voltage output defective?

charger)

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 69

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(12) Poor image transfer

Step

Cause/Defect area

Paper

Check items

Measures

Paper in cassette or LCF curled? Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change

paper.

Paper in cassette or LCF damp? Change paper.

Avoid storing paper in damp place.

Transfer charger

Registration roller

Pinch roller

Transfer charger case dirty?

Transfer charger wire dirty?

Clean transfer charger case.

Clean transfer charger wire.

Registration roller malfunctioning? Clean roller, or replace defective clutch-related

parts.

Pinch roller spring out of place? Re-mount or replace spring.

HVPS (transfer/separation High-voltage output defective?

charger/guide bias)

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit, laser scanner unit, or

are applied, or there is no prob- the transfer unit.

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 70

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(13) Poor cleaning

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Process unit (drum)

Cleaning roller

Scratches on drum surface?

Replace process unit or durm.

Cleaning roller damaged or their Replace cleaning roller.

life ended?

Heat roller

Bubbles on heat roller (94 mm Replace heat roller.

pitch on copy)?

Check and fix heater control circuit.

Replace heat roller.

Heat roller life ended?

If problem persists after measures Replace the process unit or the fuser unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 71

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(14) Faded image (low density, abnormal gray balance)

Step

Cause/Defect area

Toner empty

Transfer charger unit

Check items

Measures

"ADD TONER" symbol flashing? Replace toner cartridge.

Transfer charger unit securely in- Re-install transfer charger unit securely.

stalled?

Transfer charger wire cut off?

Replace transfer charger unit.

Process unit drive system Is auger gear of process unit Replace process unit.

driven when the PU pulley is

manually rotated clock wise?

Toner cartridge

Any abnormalities in toner car- Replace toner cartridge.

tridge?

Process unit (developer)

Magnetic roller pressure mecha- Check mechanism.

nism working normally?

Process unit

Main charger dirty?

Clean main charger wire, replace process unit

(main charger)

Process unit (drum)

or charger wire.

Film formed on drum surface?

If problem persists, replace process unit or

drum.

Note: Never touch drum surface.

DEV. motor assembly

(terminal)

Have harnesses been connected Re-install the harness.

to designated terminals of DEV.

motor assembly correctly?

(Refer to chapter 12.6 of Service

Manual.)

10 HVPS

High-voltage output defective?

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or transfer charger unit.

are applied, or there is no problem

found in above check, follow pro-

cedure described in right column.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 72

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(15) Background Fogging

Step

Cause/Defect area

Density reproduction

Check items

Measures

Image density reproduction de- Adjust density.

fect?

Main charger

Main charger dirty?

Clean main charger wire, replace process unit

or charger wire.

Process unit (developer)

Process unit (drum)

Magnetic roller pressure mecha- Check mechanism.

nism working normally?

Film formed on drum surface?

If problem persists, replace process unit or

drum.

Note: Never touch drum surface.

Adjust output from HVPS, or replace defec-

tive HVPS.

HVPS (main charger/

developer bias/

High-voltage output defective?

transfer charger

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 73

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(16) Toner offset

Approx.

94 mm

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Density too high?

Recommended paper used?

Measures

Density

Paper

Fuser

Adjust density.

Use recommended paper.

Fuser unit ground place dam- Replace ground plate.

aged?

Scratch on heat roller surface?

Heat roller life ended?

Replace heat roller.

Heat roller temperature proper? Check heater control circuit.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or heat roller.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem found in above check, follow

procedure described in right col-

umn.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 74

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(17) Poor fusing

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Paper dump?

Measures

Paper

Change paper.

Fuser unit

Pressure springs working nor- Check mechanism.

mally?

Heat roller temperature too low? Check heater control circuit.

If problem persists after measures Replace process unit or fuser unit.

are applied, or there is no prob-

lem fund in the above check, fol-

low procedure described in right

column.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 75

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(18) Defect of image density/Gray balance

Image density

Gray balance

Step

Cause/Defect area

Density/Gray balance

Printer section

Check items

Check density/gray balance.

Check test print image (Code

113).

Measures

Adjust density.

Go to step 4 if there is any problem on image.

Scanner

Original glass, mirrors or lens fil- Clean them.

ter dirty?

Printed image

Is there any faded image (low den- Perform troubleshooting for faded image.

sity)?

Is there any fog in background? Perform troubleshooting for background fog-

ging.

Is there any botch image?

Is there any transfer defect?

Perform troubleshooting for blotch image.

Perform troubleshooting for poor fusing.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 76

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(19) Moire/lack of sharpness

Moire

Step

Cause/Defect area

Density reproduction

Check items

Measures

Image density reproduction de- Adjust density.

fect?

Parameter adjustment

value

Check image processing param- Check adjustment value for sharpness.

eters.

Lack of sharpness

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Density reproduction

Image density reproduction de- Adjust density.

fect?

Parameter adjustment

value

Check image processing param- Check adjustment value for sharpness.

eters.

Print section

Adjust image processing param- Check the above encircled area A and B, and

eters.

change the sharpness intensity in the sharp-

ness adjustment mode.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 77

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(20) Uneven light distribution

Step

Cause/Defect area

Original glass

Check items

Original glass dirty?

Measures

Clean glass.

Process unit (main

charger)

Main charger wire dirty?

Clean main charger wire, replace process unit

or charger wire.

Laser scanner unit

Foreign matter or dust on lens? Remove foreign matter or dust with blower.

(Do not use a cloth)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 78

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(21) Skew (inclined image)

Moire

Step

Cause/Defect area

Cassette/LCF

Check items

Measures

Cassette or LCF properly in- Re-install cassette or LCF properly.

stalled?

Too much paper loaded in cas- Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less. (1250

sette or LCF?

sheets each or less for LCF.)

Paper in cassette or LCF curled? Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change

paper.

Cassette or LCF side guides prop- Adjust side guide.

erly installed?

Paper feed roller

Registration roller

Paper feed roller dirty?

Clean roller surface with alcohol, or replace

roller.

Registration roller dirty?

Clean roller surface with alcohol, or replace

roller.

Pinch roller

Paper guide

Pinch roller spring out of place? Re-mount or replace spring.

Paper guide improperly

mounted?

Re-install paper guide securely.

Original scale

Original scale slanted?

Carriage 1 slanted?

Adjust original scale.

Adjust carriage 1

10 Carriage 1

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 79

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(22) Image dislocation in feeding direction

Step

Cause/Defect area

Registration roller

Check items

Measures

Clean roller surface with alcohol, or replace

roller.

Registration roller dirty?

Pinch roller

Paper guide

Pinch roller spring out of place? Re-mount or replace spring.

Paper guide improperly

mounted?

Re-install paper guide.

Scanner/printer adjust-

ment defect

Same dislocation on every copy? Adjust scanner/printer using adjustment

mode.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 - 80

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(23) Jittering image

Step

Cause/Defect area

Check items

Measures

Toner image paper on drum nor- If normal, perform step 2 to 4. Otherwise per-

mal?

form step 5 and after.

Registration roller

Registration roller dirty?

Clean roller surface with alcohol, or replace

roller.

Pinch roller

Heat roller

Pinch roller spring out of place? Re-mount or replace spring.

Heat roller rotation defective?

Check heat roller drive system.

Replace gear or roller if necessary.

Process unit (Drum gear, Foreign matter or toner on gears? Clean gears.

cleaner paddle drive gear,

toner recovery auger drive

gear)

Process unit (Drum)

Carriage operation

Large scratch on drum?

Slider sheet defective?

Replace process unit or drum.

Replace slider sheet.

Any abnormalities on carriage Replace feet.

feet?

Tension of timing belt inappropri- Adjust the tension.

ate?

Carriage drive system malfunc- Check carriage drive system.

tioning?

11 Scanner

Mirror loosely mounted?

Fix mirror properly.

Wire and timing belt tension Re-install wire and timing belt with jig.

proper?

13 Drum drive system

Drum drive system malfunction- Clean or replace gears if they have stain or

ing?

scratches.

14 Main drive gear assembly Main drive gear assembly improp- Re-install main drive gear assembly with jig.

erly mounted?

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 81

e-STUDIO160/200/250 TROUBLESHOOTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5.1 Outline

When you want to use the latest version of the firmware, or when the firmware is damaged and the copier

is inoperable, the following procedure is used to update the firmware.

The firmware contains two types of data: Main Data (program data/function data/language data) stored in

the flash ROM on the main PWA, and Scanner Data stored in the flash ROM on the scanner control PWA.

The updating procedures vary with the data types. For details, refer to each procedure.

Important: • Before updating, be sure to print “FUNCTION LIST.” In case the updating fails for some

reason disabling this machine from operating, set the functions by checking with this list

and then restore the machine.

•

If updating is performed with the FAX kit (GD-1061) installed, the communication journal

data, communication error history data, communication protocol data, and job data will

be erased. Before updating, check that there is no job data and print each list of commu-

nication journal data, communication error history data, and communication protocol

data if necessary.

Downloading data from the recovery PWA.

Refer to 5.2 Using the recovery PWA (on page 5-2).

Using the batch file of the MS-DOS, downloading data from the PC.

Refer to 5.3 Using the batch file (on page 5-8).

Using the TOSHIBA Viewer, downloading data from the PC.

Refer to 5.4 Using the TOSHIBA Viewer (on page 5-20).

Using the RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration), downloading data.

* The GD-1061 (FAX kit: Option) is required.

Refer to the RDC Manual.

Note: The version of the firmware currently installed can be confirmed in the “FUNCTION LIST (In

SERVICE MODE).”

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.2 Using the Recovery PWA

Downloading procedures differ with the main data and the scanner data. Refer to the following sections:

• Main data:

5.2.1 Using the main recovery PWA (this page)

• Scanner data:

5.2.2 Using the scanner recovery PWA (on page 5-5)

5.2.1 Using main recovery PWA

Important: While downloading, do not turn off the power of the copier. Data may be damaged, caus-

ing the copier not to operate normally.

(1) On the main recovery PWA, install the ROM that stores data for the update.

Closely follow the ROM installation direction.

Connector

Main recovery PWA

ROM 2

ROM 1

05-02-01

Fig 5-2-1

(2) Turn off the power.

(3) Remove the rear cover.

Rear cover

05-02-02-1

Fig 5-2-2

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(4) Insert the main recovery PWA into CN10 of the main PWA, with the ROM mounting side facing down.

Main PWA

Main recovery PWA

CN10

05-02-03

Fig 5-2-3

(5) Turn on the power.

Downloading of the main data starts.

The downloading status is displayed on the LCD of the copier as follows:

• Data is being downloaded from the ROM on the recovery PWA to the DRAM on the main PWA.

The number of displayed squares („) increases.

Number of downloaded data

1: Main data

(2: Scanner data)

• Data is being stored in the flash ROM from the DRAM.

The number of displayed squares („) decreases.

• Downloading is completed.

All dots are blinking.

Note: It takes approx. 5 minutes to download the main data.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 3

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(6) Turn off the power.

(7) Remove the main recovery PWA and attach the rear cover.

Important: Only when the main data is downloaded after changing the main PWA.

In such a case, follows the step (a) through (g) described below.

(a) Holding down the [0] and [8] keys, turn on the power.

The copier enters the System mode.

(b) Enter “388” using the numeric keys and press the [SET]/[START] key.

The total counter value is baked up.

(d) Holding down the [1], [3] and [*] keys, turn on the power and wait until "Please wait"

message is displayed.

(e) Turn off the power.

(f) Holding down the [1], [3] and [#] keys, turn on the power and wait until "Please wait"

message is displayed.

(g) Turn off the power.

(8) Holding down the [*], and [#] keys, turn on the power and wait until "Please wait" message is displayed.

The memory is cleared.

Important: After downloading the data, perform memory clear by turning the power ON while holding

down the [*] and [#] keys. This machine may not operate normally if this operation is not

performed. Also, if memory clear is performed by any operation other than the above, the

function setting data, user setting data, etc. may be erased. Do not perform any memory

clear operation other than the above.

(9) Turn off the power.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.2.2 Using the scanner recovery PWA

Important: Do not turn off the power of the copier while downloading. Data may be damaged, causing

the copier not to operate normally.

(1) On the scanner recovery PWA, install the ROM that stores data for the update.

Closely follow the ROM installation direction.

Connector

Scanner recovery PWA

ROM

05-02-04

Fig 5-2-4

(2) Turn off the power.

(3) Open the Original cover (KA-1600PC)/ADF (MR-2012)/RADF (MR-3011).

(4) Removes the original glass and the original glass stay.

Original glass

Original glass stay

05-02-05

Fig 5-2-5

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5) Remove the blind plate.

Blind plate

05-02-06-1

Fig 5-2-6

(6) Insert the main recovery PWA into CN3 of the scanner control PWA, with the ROM mounting side

facing outside the copier.

Scanner recovery PWA

CN3

Scanner control PWA

05-02-07-1

Fig 5-2-7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(7) Turn on the power.

Downloading of the scanner data starts.

The exposure lamp flashes as follows depending on the downloading status.

• The exposure lamp flashes once: Downloading starts.

• The exposure lamp flashes twice: Downloading ends.

Note: It takes approx. 10 to 20 seconds to download the scanner data.

(8) Turn off the power.

(9) Remove the scanner recovery PWA.

(10) Attach the blind plate.

(11) Attaches the original glass and the original glass stay.

Note: When attachings the original glass and the original glass stay, adjustment is required. For adjust-

ing procedure, refer to the following section:

(b) Installing original glass of 1.8.1 Installing glass

Important: When the power is turned ON after completing the updating, an error may occur with “F14”

displayed on the LCD. In such a case, follows the steps (12) through (15) described below.

(12) Turn off the power.

(13) Holding down the [0] and [8] keys, turn on the power.

The copier enters the System mode.

(14) Enter “389” using the numeric keys and press the [SET] / [START] key.

The total counter value is backed up.

(15) Turn off the power.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.3 Using the Batch File

You can execute the download program from the batch file on MS-DOS and download the firmware into

the copier from the PC for update.

This method consists of the following two procedures: “Download Disk Creation” and “Download Run

Operation.” Once download disks are created, you can update the firmware in more than one copier or

other machines to the one of the same latest version simply by performing the download operation using

the created download disks.

Important:

• The following environment is required to execute the download program.

PC:

IBM PC/AT or compatible machine

(Requires a parallel interface conforming to IEEE1284)

MS-DOS or Windows 95/98

OS:

Cable: Parallel cable conforming to IEEE1284

• While the data is being updated, do not turn the copier or PC power OFF, or the data

may be destroyed and the copier may fail to operate normally.

5.3.1 Creating Download Disks

For downloading, it is necessary to create “download disks” containing the download program and update

data. This procedure requires two blank floppy disks. They should be prepared before following the proce-

dure described below.

Important:

• Do not remove the floppy disk from the drive until you are instructed to do so. The disk

or drive may be damaged.

• The download program consists of the following files:

MKRPCDSK.BAT

DISK.EXE

These two files must be stored under the same directory (folder). If they are stored

under different directories, the download program cannot be run normally.

Described below is an example where a “work” directory is created under the route

directory on drive C and then the program files are stored.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The MS-DOS prompt screen shows the following:

05-03-001

(1) Type “mkrpcdsk” and press the [Enter] key.

05-03-002

The batch file is executed and the download disk creation program is started.

05-03-003

(2) Insert a blank floppy disk (Disk 1) in the drive and press the [Enter] key.

05-03-004

(3) Press the [Enter] key.

Formatting of Disk 1 begins.

05-03-005

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 9

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When formatting is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-006

(4) Press the [Enter] key.

(5) Type “n” and press the [Enter] key.

05-03-007

The download program is copied to Disk 1.

05-03-008

When copying to Disk 1 is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-009

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 10

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(6) Remove Disk 1 from drive A.

(7) Insert a blank floppy disk (Disk 2) in drive A, press the [Enter] key.

05-03-010

(8) Press the [Enter] key.

Formatting of Disk 2 begins.

05-03-011

When formatting is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-012

(9) Press the [Enter] key.

(10) Type “n” and press the [Enter] key.

05-03-013

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 11

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The download program is copied to Disk 2.

05-03-014

When copying to Disk 2 is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-015

(11) Press the [Enter] key.

Creation of the download disks (Disks 1 and 2) is now completed. Using the created download disks, you

can update the firmware in more than one copier or other machines to the one of the same latest version

simply by performing the download operation. For the download operating procedure, refer to “5.3.2

Downloading.”

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 12

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.3.2 Downloading

Download the firmware by using the download disks (Disks 1 and 2) created in the procedure of “5.3.1

Creating Download Disks”

Important:

• The download program cannot be run normally at the MS-DOS prompt after Windows

95/98 is started. Once end Windows, insert the download disk (Disk 1) in the drive, and

turn the power ON to directly start the program from the floppy disk.

• While the data is being updated, do not turn the copier or PC power OFF, or the data

may be destroyed and the copier may fail to operate normally.

• Do not remove the floppy disk from the drive until you are instructed to do so. The disk

or drive may be damaged.

(1) Insert the download disk (Disk 1) in the floppy disk drive and turn the PC power ON.

The download menu screen appears.

05-03-016

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 13

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) Select download data by pressing the [↑] or [↓] key on the PC and press the [Enter] key.

Notes: • The relations between the menu and the data to be downloaded are as follows:

1. Start PC Recovery (Main) → The main data only is downloaded.

2. Start PC Recovery (Scanner Unit) → The scanner data only is downloaded.

3. Start PC Recovery (Main + Scanner Unit)

→ Both the main data and scanner data are downloaded.

(The main data is downloaded, followed by the scanner data.)

• If 60 seconds elapse without performing any operation after the download menu is displayed,

“1. Start PC recovery (Main)” will be selected automatically.

The necessary files are copied to the temporary area in the PC from Disk 1.

05-03-017

When copying is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-018

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 14

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(3) Remove Disk 1 from the drive and insert Disk 2. Then press any key. The necessary files are copied

to the temporary area in the PC from Disk 2.

05-03-019

When copying is completed, the following screen appears.

05-03-020

The following operations are different depending on the menu selected in step (2).

When 1. Start PC Recovery (Main) is selected:

→ Refer to “Downloading procedure for main data.” (this page)

When 2. Start PC Recovery (Scanner Unit) is selected:

→ Refer to “Downloading procedure for scanner data.” (on page 5-17)

When 3. Start PC Recovery (Main + Scanner Unit) is selected:

→ Refer to “Downloading procedure for main data” and “Downloading procedure for scan-

ner data.”

Downloading procedure for main data: Steps (4) through (7)

(4) Turn the copier power OFF and connect it to the PC through the parallel cable.

(5) While pressing the [2], [*] and [#] keys on the copier, turn the power ON.

The following appears on the LCD.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 15

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(6) Press any key on the PC.

Downloading of the main data begins.

Screen display on the PC

05-03-021

LCD display on the copier

Boxes ( ) are displayed one by one

(2 rounds).

Boxes ( ) are erased one by one.

Important:

Some time after downloading begins, the message prompting you to perform the next

operation appears on the PC screen. However, downloading is in progress until the LCD of

the copier blinks as shown below. Do not perform any operation. Performing any operation

during this period may cause the downloading to be discontinued and fail and the copier

may not be recovered unless you use the recovery PWA.

Note: The downloading time is about 8 minutes.

When downloading ends, all the dots on the copier LCD will blink.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 16

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(7) After confirming that all the dots on the copier LCD screen are blinking, perform the following opera-

tion according to the items in the download menu selected.

When 1. Start PC Recovery (Main) is selected:

→ Proceed to step (11). (on page 5-19)

When 3. Start PC Recovery (Main + Scanner Unit) is selected:

→ The following screen appears on the PC. Thereafter, perform downloading of scanner

data by referring to “Downloading procedure for scanner data.”

05-03-022

Downloading procedure for scanner data: Steps (8) through (11)

(8) Turn the copier power OFF and connect it to the PC through the parallel cable.

(9) While pressing the [2], [*] and [#] keys on the copier, turn the power ON.

The following appears on the copier LCD.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 17

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(10) Press any key on the PC.

Downloading of the main data begins.

Screen display on the PC

05-03-023

LCD display on the copier

Boxes ( ) are displayed one by one.

Important:

Some time after downloading begins, the message prompting you to perform the next

operation appears on the PC screen. However, downloading is in progress until the LCD of

the copier blinks as shown below. Do not perform any operation. Performing any operation

during this period may cause the downloading to be discontinued and fail and the PC may

not be recovered unless you use the recovery PWA.

Note: The downloading time is about 1 minute and 30 seconds.

When downloading ends, all the dots on the copier LCD will blink.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 18

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(11) When downloading ends, the following screen appears.

05-03-024

To perform downloading again:

→ Press the [Enter] key and follow the selected menu again.

To update the main data, proceed to step (4). (on page 5-15)

To update the scanner data, proceed to step (8). (on page 5-17)

To terminate the download program:

→ Press the [C] key while pressing the [Ctrl] key and follow step (12) and subsequent.

(12) Press the [Y] key.

(13) Turn the copier and PC power OFF.

Only when the main data is downloaded, perform the following operation to clear the memory.

(14) While pressing the [*] and [#] keys on the copier, turn the power ON and wait until "Please wait"

message is displyed.

(15) Turn the copier power OFF.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 19

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.4 Using the TOSHIBA Viewer

Using the TOSHIBA Viewer, you can download the firmware from the PC to this copier for updating.

Important: • Data to be downloaded should be stored in the same drive as the TOSHIBA Viewer

program. If the data is stored in a different drive (including a floppy disk or the drive of

another PC connected to the network), downloading may not be performed normally.

•

Do not turn off the power of the copier and the PC while data is being updated. Data may

be damaged causing the copier not to operate normally.

(1) Start the TOSHIBA Viewer, and then Click “Setup” on the main welcome menu.

Fig. 5-4-1

The Toshiba Setup screen appears.

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 20

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(2) Double click “Download” in Data sources.

Fig. 5-4-2

The Service setting dialog box appears.

(3) Enter the password “TSBSERVICE”.

Fig. 5-4-3

(4) Click “OK”.

The Download firmware update dialog box appears.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 21

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5) Select the file for the download firmware.

Fig. 5-4-4

Click “Browse” to select the file to be downloaded.

The selected files are displayed in File.

Fig. 5-4-5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

5 - 22

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes: • The files with the checked boxes are downloaded. Up to four files can be downloaded.

• The following files should be selected for the banks. Select files according to bank.

Bank 1 : Program data

Bank 2 : Function data

Bank 3 : Language data

Bank 4 : Scanner data

When an inappropriate file is selected for the bank, the following message is displayed.

Select the appropriate file.

Fig. 5-4-6

(6) Click “OK”.

Downloading starts and the file that is downloaded is displayed.

Fig. 5-4-7

Notes: • It takes approx. 20 minutes to download the data (when four files are downloded).

• The copier is automatically reset while downloading.

When the downloading is completed, the following dialog box is displayed.

Fig. 5-4-8

(7) Click “OK”.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 23

e-STUDIO160/200/250 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

6.1 AC Wire Harness

06-01-01

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

06-02-01

e-STUDIO160/200/250 SERVICE HANDBOOK

6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

6.2 DC Wire Harness

e-STUDIO180/250サービスマニュアル PPCサービス編

6. 束線結線図

6.2 DC 結線図

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.3 Connector Table

PWA-F-MAN

PWA-F-PNL-TO

PWA-F-SLG

CN3 PWA-F-MAN (CN3) <-> PWA-F-NCU- (US: CN9)/(EU: CN4)/(JP: CN4)

CN8 PWA-F-MAN (CN8) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4)

CN61 PWA-F-PNL-TO (CN61) <-> PWA-F-VR-TO (CN61)

CN2 PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> INV-EXPO-AT/AW

CN9 PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN1)

Pin No

Symbol

+12V

SGND

OS1

SGND

OS2

SGND

CCDCP

SGND

CCDRS

SGND

CK1A

SGND

CK2B

SGND

CK2A

SGND

CCDSH

+5V

Name

Active

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

H:Dial make

H:3db inserted

Pin No

Symbol

SIDTA0

Name

Scanner image data bus 0

Active

Pin No

Symbol

VREF

Name

LCD density reference voltage (-12V)

LCD drive voltage

Active

Pin No

Symbol

+24V

LAMP

Name

Active

+12V

TX1

RX1

FAX transmit data signal

FAX receive data signal

CML relay control signal

Dial pulse generate signal

Non connection

+24V

SIDTA1

SIDTA2

SIDTA3

SIDTA4

SIDTA5

SIDTA6

SIDTA7

SCDCLK

SHDEN

SVDEN

RXD

Scanner image data bus 1

Scanner image data bus 2

Scanner image data bus 3

Scanner image data bus 4

Scanner image data bus 5

Scanner image data bus 6

Scanner image data bus 7

Scanner image data transfer clock

Scanner image data horizontal effective signal

Scanner image data vertical effective signal

Scanner receive data signal

Scanner transmit data signal

Scanner request to send signal

Scanner clear to send signal

Scanner data terminal ready signal

Scanner data set ready signal

Scanner reset signal (from Scanner unit)

Scanner HSYNC signal

Exposure lamp ON signal

Power ground

Signalground

CCD signal output 1

Signalground

CCD signal output 2

Signalground

CCD cramp gate signal

Signalground

CCD reset signal

Signalground

CML1

LD1

GREF

LCD density reference ground (Signal ground)

ATT3DB1

RLADJ11

RLADJ21

Attenuator signal

CN62 PWA-F-PNL-TO (CN62) <-> PWA-F-OTK (CN63)

Pin No

CN6 PWA-F-SLG (CN6) <-> ADF/RADF

Pin No

Return loss adjust signal 1

Return loss adjust signal 2

Non connection

Signal ground

Symbol

Name

LED illuminate voltage (+5V)

SCAN LED illuminate signal

FAX LED illuminate signal

Switch scan signal 2

Switch scan signal 3

Switch scan signal 4

Switch scan signal 5

Switch condition signal 0

Switch condition signal 1

Switch condition signal 2

Switch condition signal 3

Switch condition signal 4

Switch condition signal 5

Switch condition signal 6

Switch condition signal 7

Switch condition signal 8

Switch condition signal 9

Switch condition signal 10

Switch condition signal 11

Switch condition signal 12

Switch condition signal 13

Switch condition signal 14

Active

H:Push

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

+24V

LED5X

LED4X

SWS2

SWS3

SWS4

SWS5

SWC0

SWC1

SWC2

SWC3

SWC4

SWC5

SWC6

SWC7

SWC8

SWC9

SWC10

SWC11

SWC12

SWC13

SWC14

ADF motor phase-A signal/

RADF non connection

ADF motor phase-/A signal/

RADF non connection

ADF motor phase-B signal/

RADF non connection

ADF motor phase-/B signal/

RADF non connection

-12V

+12V

-12V

Analog ground

+12V

Non connection

Analog ground

CCD transfer clock phase-1 signal

Signalground

TXD

HT/REQ

SC/ACK

DTR

CCD transfer final signal

Signalground

CI1

CCD transfer clock phase-2 signal

Signalground

CI detect signal

Answer tone detect signal

Line current detect signal

Line current reverse detect signal

Hook detect signal

Non connection

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Signal ground

DEN

CCD shift gate signal

+5V

ANSDET0

REVA1

REVB1

HOOK1

SCNRST

PHSYC

HT/ACK

SC/REQ

APDS1

COVER1

5VPS

+5V

3.3V

+12V

+5V

D/A

Power ground

+5V

Signal ground

+5V

L:Off hook H:On hook

Scanner data terminal ready signal (Reserve)

Scanner data set ready signal (Reserve)

Non connection

ADF/RADF original detected signal

Original cover open detect signal

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

+5V

+3.3V

Signal ground

ADF read sensor LED adjustment signal/

RADF non connection

ADF read sensor detect signal/

RADF non connection

ADF registration sensor detect signal/

Scanner acknowledge signal

ADF non connection/

RADF strobe control signal

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

ADF original empty sensor detect signal/

RADF original empty sensor detect signal

ADF open sensor detect signal/

RADF non connection

5VPS

POS

CN13 PWA-F-SLG (CN13) <-> APS-1/2/3/4

Pin No

L:Present

L:Open

Symbol

Name

Active

+5V

-12V

Analog ground

+12V

Non connection

REGST/ACK

VALID/DFFAN

+5V

SENS1

+5V

SENS2

+5V

SENS3

+5V

SENS4

+5V

-12V

+12V

APS sensor 1 detect signal

Signal ground

+5V

5VPS

EMPTY

APS sensor 2 detect signal

Signal ground

H:Original empty

+5V

Signal ground

+12V

Analog ground

DF_OPN

L:ADF open

L:ADF top cover open

LCD1 PWA-F-PNL-TO(LCD1)<->LCD UNIT(LCD1)

Pin No

APS sensor 3 detect signal

Signal ground

Symbol

Name

Active

CN4 PWA-F-MAN (CN4) <-> PWA-F-PIF (CN2)

Pin No

COVER/RXD

ADF top cover open switch detect signal/

RADF RXD signal

FLM

SCP

+5V

-12V

LCD indicate data

Frame signal

Non connection

Data latch signal

Data shift clock

Signal ground

+5V

Signal ground

-12V

LCD drive voltage

+5V

Symbol

POEX

Name

Active

H:Open

L:to PC H:from PC

APS sensor 4 detect signal

Signal ground

GDI gate control signal

PC I/F direction signal

WIDTH/TXD

Signal ground

PCDIR

PCFWENA

PCIFD0

PCIFD1

PCIFD2

PCIFD3

PCIFD4

PCIFD5

PCIFD6

PCIFD7

PCDET

NSTROB

NATFD

NINIT

ADF original width sensor/

RADF TXD signal

CN9 PWA-F-MAN (CN9) <-> PWA-F-PNL-TO (CN60)

Pin No

PCL/GDI bus arbitration enable signal

PC I/F data bus 0

Symbol

Name

Operation panel data bus 0

Active

Signal ground

PC I/F data bus 1

PC I/F data bus 2

PC I/F data bus 3

PC I/F data bus 4

PC I/F data bus 5

PC I/F data bus 6

PC I/F data bus 7

PC I/F PWA detect signal

OD0

OD1

OD2

OD3

OD4

OD5

OD6

OD7

5IOCS0X

OPIOWRX

OPIOIRDX

OA1

OA2

OA3

OA4

OPRESETX

-12V

+5V

HAISI/DF-ACK

ADF exit sensor detect signal/

RADF acknowledge signal

ADF size sensor detect signal/

RADF request signal

L:Original feeding

CN14 PWA-F-SLG (CN14) <-> APS-5/6

Pin No

Operation panel data bus 1

Operation panel data bus 2

Operation panel data bus 3

Operation panel data bus 4

Operation panel data bus 5

Operation panel data bus 6

Operation panel data bus 7

5V I/O Chip select signal

Operation panel I/O write signal

Operation panel I/O read signal

Operation panel address bus 1

Operation panel address bus 2

Operation panel address bus 3

Operation panel address bus 4

Signal ground

Operation panel reset signal

Analog ground

-12V

+5V

Signal ground

Power save LED lighting signal

Power save key detect signal

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Symbol

Name

Active

SIZE2/DF-REQ

ADF CNT/REQ

RADF CNT

L:Original present

+5V

SENS5

+5V

SENS6

+5V

APS sensor 5 detect signal

Signal ground

ADF connect signal/

Scanner request signal

ADF non connection/

RADF connect signal

ADF non connection/

L:Connected

+5V

APS sensor 6 detect signal

Signal ground

L:Connected

CN14 PWA-F-MAN (CN14) <-> PWA-F-MAN-AU1/PWA-F-RLY-AU1

Pin No

PC I/F nStrobe/HostClk signal

PC I/F nAutoFd/HostBusy/HostAck signal

PC I/F nInit/nReverseRequest signal

PC I/F interrupt signal

PC I/F nSelectin/1284 active signal

PC I/F nAck/PtrClk/PerihClk signal

PC I/F Busy/PtrBusy/PerihAck signal

PC I/F PError/AckDataReq/nAckReverse signal

PC I/F Select/Xflag signal

PC I/F nFault/DataAvail/nPeriphRequest signal

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Signal ground

Symbol

Name

Active

RADF Signal ground

Non connection

5IORDX

D15

D13

D11

AU1INT

PCIFD7

PCIFD5

PCIFD3

PCIFD1

NFAULT

PEERR

NACK

AU1INIT

NATFD

PCDIR

DPOD15

DPOD13

DPOD11

DPOD9

DPOD7

DPOD5

DPOD3

DPOD1

DPOA16

DPOA14

DPOA12

DPOA10

DPOA8

DPOA6

DPOA4

DPOA2

DPOA0

CSP1X

DPORWX

INTPRX

Signal ground

2WNINI

NSELIN

NACK

PS-LVPS-US/EU-AT/AW

CN5 PS-LVPS-US/EU-AT/AW (CN5) <-> SIIL-SW/FRIL-SW

Pin No

5V I/O read signal

System data bus 15

System data bus 13

System data bus 11

System data bus 9

System data bus 7

System data bus 5

System data bus 3

System data bus 1

System address bus 9

System address bus 7

System address bus 5

System address bus 3

System address bus 1

NIC/IFAX kit interrupt signal

PC I/F data bus 7

PC I/F data bus 5

PC I/F data bus 3

PC I/F data bus 1

PC I/F nFault/DataAvail/nPeriphRequest signal

PC I/F PError/AckDataReq/nAckReverse signal

PC I/F nAck/PtrClk/PerihClk signal

NIC/IFAX kit interrupt input signal

PC I/F nAutoFd/HostBusy/HostAck signal

PC I/F direction signal

CN7 PWA-F-SLG(CN7)<->SCN-MOT

Pin No

BUSY

PEERR

SELECT

NFAULT

5VPS

Symbol

Name

Scanner motor phase-A signal

+24V

Scanner motor phase-/A signal

Scanner motor phase-B signal

+24V

Active

Symbol

C/O-IN

Name

Active

+24V

S/A

+24V

S/B

Cover open interlock switch input voltage

(+24V to Front/Side cover interlock switches)

Cover open interlock switch output voltage

(+24V from Front/Side cover interlock switches)

C/O-OU

5VPS

100

Signal ground

PWRSVLED

PWRSVKEY

5VPS

Scanner motor phase-/B signal

CN36 PWA-F-RLY (CN36) <-> PWA-PFC (CN201)

Pin No

CN5 PWA-F-MAN (CN5) <-> PWA-F-PCL

Pin No

CN8 PWA-F-SLG (CN8) <-> HOME-SEN/ORCOV-SEN

Pin No

Symbol

PFCDET

Name

Active

L:Connected

Symbol

POEX

PCFWENA

NATFD

2WNINI

NACK

Name

Active

H:Open

L:Error

Symbol

Name

Active

PFC PWA detect signal

Signal ground

GDI gate control signal

+5V

HPSEN

+5V

PLSEN

+5V

Signal ground

PCL/GDI bus arbitration enable signal

PC I/F nAutoFd/HostBusy/HostAck signal

PC I/F interrupt signal

PC I/F nAck/PtrClk/PerihClk signal

PC I/F PError/AckDataReq/nAckReverse signal

PC I/F nFault/DataAvail/nPeriphRequest signal

PC I/F data bus 6

24VCHK

PFCRST

RSTPR

RGTST

EXIT/SW

PSTP/1

PFRXD

PFREQ

PFACK

Interlock switch detect signal

Optional parts reset signal

Paper set pre-registration signal

Registration roller clutch drive signal

Exit sensor output signal

L:Front/Side cover open

CN11 PWA-F-MAN (CN11) <-> PWA-F-IPC

Pin No

Home position sensor detect signal

+5V

H:Home position

Symbol

Name

Active

+5V

5IOWRX

IOCS11X

+5V

Signal ground

+5V

Signal ground

H:ON

H:Feeding

PEERR

NFAULT

PCIFD6

PCIFD4

PCIFD2

PCIFD0

CRDYX

PEADYX

ERROR

VSP

COMREQPCL

DPOA15

DPOA13

DPOA11

DPOA9

DPOA7

DPOA5

DPOA3

DPOA1

DPOD15

DPOD13

DPOD11

DPOD9

DPOD7

DPOD5

DPOD3

DPOD1

DPORESX

Original cover sensor detect signal

H:Cover close

System address bus 1

System address bus 3

System address bus 5

System address bus 7

System data bus 0

System data bus 2

System data bus 4

System data bus 6

Signal ground

5V I/O write signal

I/O chip select 11 signal

+5V

Signal ground

Feed sensor output signal

PFC receive data signal

PC I/F data bus 4

PC I/F data bus 2

PC I/F data bus 0

PFC request to send signal

PFC data set ready signal

PFC data terminal ready signal

PFC transmit data signal

100

PWA-F-RLY

L:to PC H:from PC

MACK/PF

PFTXD

MREQ/PF

PCL command ready signal

PCL print ready signal

DPO I/F data bus 15

DPO I/F data bus 13

DPO I/F data bus 11

CN23 PWA-F-RLY (CN23) <-> PS-LVPS-US/EU-AW (CN6)

Pin No

System control GA request to send signal

Symbol

HT1ON

3.3V

+5V

5VPS

+12V

-12V

+24V

HT2ON

PWS

Name

Active

PCL error signal

VSP signal

Heater lamp 1 ON signal

+3.3V

+5V

DPO I/F data bus

PCL command request signal

DPO I/F address bus 15

DPO I/F address bus 13

DPO I/F address bus 11

DPO I/F address bus 9

DPO I/F address bus 7

DPO I/F address bus 5

DPO I/F address bus 3

DPO I/F address bus 1

DPO I/F data bus 15

CN37 PWA-F-RLY (CN37) <->T-UP-SEN/PE-SEN/PU-CLT/T-UP-MOT/RGST-CLT

Pin No

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

+12V

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

Signal ground

+24V

Pickup detect signal

-12V

+24V

Power ground

DPO I/F address bus 16

DPO I/F address bus 14

DPO I/F address bus 12

DPO I/F address bus 10

DPO I/F address bus 8

DPO I/F address bus 6

DPO I/F address bus 4

DPO I/F address bus 2

DPO I/F address bus 0

IFAX chip select signal

DPO read/write signal

NIC/IFAX interrupt printer signal

Signal ground

5V I/O write signal

I/O chip select signal 3

System data bus 14

System data bus 12

System data bus 10

System data bus 8

System data bus 6

System data bus 4

System data bus 2

System data bus 0

System address bus 8

System address bus 6

System address bus 4

System address bus 2

NIC/IFAX PWA detect signal

Power saver mode enable signal

PC I/F data bus 6

LPSON

PUCON

+5V

LUMON

+24V

PESON

+24V

H:Pickup completed

+5V

Pickup roller clutch drive voltage (+24V)

System address bus 2

System address bus 4

System address bus 6

System address bus 8

System data bus 1

System data bus 3

System data bus 5

System data bus 7

Signal ground

+24V (When Front/Side cove open = cut off)

Power ground

+5V

Tray-up motor drive voltage (+24V)

Signal ground

Tray-up motor drive reverse voltage (PG)

Paper empty detect signal

+24V

Heater lamp 2 ON signal

Power save control signal

Signal ground

Analog ground

+24V (for Scanner unit)

Power ground

+24V (for Finisher)

DPO I/F data bus 13

DPO I/F data bus 11

H:Empty

24VF1

DPO I/F data bus

DPO reset signal

Non connection

Wait signal

+5V

PRCON

+5V

5IORDX

5RESETX

+5V

L:Write H:Read

Registration roller clutch drive voltage (+24V)

5V I/O read signal

Reset signal

+5V

24VF2

5IOWRX

IOCS3X

D14

D12

D10

CN38 PWA-F-RLY (CN38) <-> CST-SW

Pin No

IPCDET

IPC PWA (Finisher) detect signal

L:Connected

WAIT

Symbol

Name

Active

L:Present

RBDINX

G/PSEL

+5V

NIC connect signal

GDI/PCL select signal

+5V

L:Connected

L:PCL H:GDI

CASSETTE

Non connection

Recording cassette detect signal

Signal ground

CN12 PWA-F-MAN (CN12) <-> PWA-F-MEM 1 (CN106)

Pin No

CN24 PWA-F-RLY (CN24) <-> PS-HVPS

Pin No

Symbol

PIXA0

PIXA2

PIXA4

PIXA6

PIXA8

PIXA10

PIXA12

CS2XB

PBA1

PSDRASXR

PSDDQMUR

SDCLK1

PIXD0

PIXD2

PIXD4

PIXD6

PIXD8

PIXD10

PIXD12

PIXD14

SDRM1ID

3.3V

PIXA1

PIXA3

PIXA5

PIXA7

PIXA9

PIXA11

CS1XB

PBA0

PSDWER

PSDCASXR

PSDDQMLR

PSDCKER

PIXD1

Name

Active

Symbol

CCON

DVVR

TCON

TCVR

GVR

SPON

SPVR

PGON

Name

Main charger control signal

Active

+5V

PIX address bus 0

PIX address bus 2

PIX address bus 4

PIX address bus 6

PIX address bus 8

PIX address bus 10

PIX address bus 12

Optional memory PWA 1 chip select signal 2

PIX SDRAM bank select address 1 signal

PIX SDRAM RAS signal

PIX SDRAM I/O musk upper signal

Optional memory PWA 1 clock signal

PIX data bus 0

PIX data bus 2

PIX data bus 4

PIX data bus 6

PIX data bus 8

PIX data bus 10

PIX data bus 12

PIX data bus 14

Optional memory PWA 1 type detect signal

+3.3V

Signal ground

PIX address bus 1

PIX address bus 3

PIX address bus 5

PIX address bus 7

PIX address bus 9

PIX address bus 11

Optional memory PWA 1 chip select signal 1

PIX SDRAM bank select address 0 signal

PIX SDRAM write signal

PIX SDRAM CAS signal

PIX SDRAM I/O musk lower signal

PIX SDRAM clock enable signal

PIX data bus 1

PIX data bus 3

PIX data bus 5

PIX data bus 7

PIX data bus 9

5VPS

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Signal ground

Development bias reference signal

Transfer charger control signal

Transfer bias reference voltage signal

+24V(When Front/Side cove open = cut off)

Power ground

CN39 PWA-F-RLY (CN39) <-> TS-MOT

Pin No

Symbol

Name

+24V (When Front/Side cove open = cut off)

Toner supply motor drive signal

Non connection

Active

PCDET

PC I/F PWA detect signal

Signal ground

L:Connected

TSMON

H:ON

Grid reference voltage signal

Separation charger control signal

Separation bias reference signal

Paper guide plate/Pinch roller control signal

CN41 PWA-F-RLY (CN41) <-> JSP/OCT/Bridge cover (Finisher)

Pin No

AU1SET

PSVENA

PCIFD6

PCIFD4

PCIFD2

PCIFD0

SELECT

BUSY

NSELIN

NINIT

NSTROB

OPOEX

DPOD14

DPOD12

DPOD10

DPOD8

DPOD6

DPOD4

DPOD2

DPOD0

DPOA15

DPOA13

DPOA11

DPOA9

DPOA7

DPOA5

DPOA3

DPOA1

DPORESX

OEPX

WAIT

L:Connected

Symbol

OFFSET2

OFFSET1

+24V

Name

Active

PCDIR

NSTROB

NINIT

NSELIN

BUSY

PC I/F direction signal

PC I/F nStrobe/HostClk signal

PC I/F nInit/nReverseRequest signal

PC I/F nSelectin/1284 active signal

PC I/F Busy/PtrBusy/PerihAck signal

PC I/F Select/Xflag signal

PC I/F data bus 7

L:to PC H:from PC

OCT motor drive signal 2

OCT motor drive signal 1

Power ground

CN26 PWA-F-RLY (CN26) <-> PWA-PDV (CN168)

Pin No

PC I/F data bus 4

PC I/F data bus 2

PC I/F data bus 0

Symbol

+24V

/START

/READY

CLK

Name

Active

H:ON

L: Constant speed

+24V

Power ground

JSSON

JFLS2ON

JSP/Bridge cover solenoid drive voltage (+24V)

JSP stack sensor (Upper) detect signal /

OCT separate sensor detect signal

JSP paper jam sensor detect signal /

OCT paper jam sensor detect signal /

Bridge cover paper jam sensor detect signal

JSP cover open switch detect signal /

OCT cover open switch detect signal /

Bridge cover relay cover open switch detect signal

JSP/OCT distinction signal

SELECT

PCIFD7

PCIFD5

PCIFD3

PCIFD1

POWER

TXDPCL

RXDPCL

PCLVD

DOTCLK

DPOA16

DPOA14

DPOA12

DPOA10

DPOA8

DPOA6

DPOA4

DPOA2

DPOA0

DPOD14

DPOD12

DPOD10

DPOD8

DPOD6

DPOD4

DPOD2

DPOD0

CSP1X

DPORWX

INTPRX

PCLSET

G/PCHK

+5V

PC I/F Select/Xflag signal

PC I/F Busy/PtrBusy/PerihAck signal

PC I/F nSelectin/1284 active signal

PC I/F nInit/nReverseRequest signal

PC I/F nStrobe/HostClk signal

GDI gate control signal

DPO I/F data bus 14

DPO I/F data bus 12

DPO I/F data bus 10

H:Paper full

H:Initial position

Polygonal motor drive signal

Polygonal motor status signal

Polygonal motor clock

PC I/F data bus 5

PC I/F data bus 3

PC I/F data bus 1

JOB/JAM

JCOSON

H:Paper jam

PCL power on signal

PCL transmit data signal

PCL receive data signal

PCL video data signal

EET dot clock

DPO I/F address bus 16

DPO I/F address bus 14

DPO I/F address bus 12

DPO I/F address bus 10

DPO I/F address bus 8

DPO I/F address bus 6

DPO I/F address bus 4

DPO I/F address bus 2

DPO I/F address bus 0

DPO I/F data bus 14

DPO I/F data bus 12

DPO I/F data bus 10

H:ON

H:Open

H:Cover open

CN27 PWA-F-RLY (CN27) <->TNR-SEN (In Process unit)

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

JOB/SW

F/SELECT

JCONECT

L:JSP H:OCT

L:Connected

+5V

Not used

DPO I/F data bus

Finisher detection signal

DTHA

TES

JSP/OCT/Finisher detection signal

Signal ground

JSP stack sensor (Lower) detect signal /

OCT stack sensor detect signal /

Bridge cover stack sensor detect signal

+5V

Toner empty sensor drive/detection signal

Signal ground

FLS1ON

H:Paper full

DPO I/F address bus 15

DPO I/F address bus 13

DPO I/F address bus 11

DPO I/F address bus 9

DPO I/F address bus 7

DPO I/F address bus 5

DPO I/F address bus 3

DPO I/F address bus 1

DPO reset signal

Non connection

Wait signal

NIC connect signal

Signal ground

+5V

JPOSON

CN28 PWA-F-RLY (CN28) <-> MD-MOT-AT/AW

Pin No

Bridge cover exit sensor detect signal

H:Present

Symbol

Name

+24V (When Front/Side cove open = cut off)

Power ground

Active

Power ground

CN42 PWA-F-RLY (CN42) <-> Coin vendor

Pin No

+24V (When Front/Side cove open = cut off)

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

PIXD3

PIXD5

PIXD7

PIXD9

PIXD11

PIXD13

PIXD15

3.3V

DPO I/F data bus

+24V

Coin vendor ON/OFF control signal

Power ground

RBDINX

L:Connected

CN29 PWA-F-RLY (CN29) <-> MD-MOT-AT

Pin No

PIX data bus 11

PIX data bus 13

PIX data bus 15

+3.3V

Signal ground

Optional memory PWA 1 detect signal

Symbol

MMTR-ON

MMTR-RFL

PLL-OK

Name

Main motor ON/OFF signal

Non connection

Main motor clock

Main motor synchronized signal

Signal ground

Active

L:ON

IFAX chip select signal

DPO read/write signal

NIC/IFAX interrupt printer signal

PCL PWA detect signal

GDI/PCL check signal

+5V

L:Write H:Read

L:Connected

L:PCL H:GDI

CN44 PWA-F-RLY (CN44) <-> HEA1-THM/HEA2-THM

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Heater thermistor connect check voltage (+3.3V)

+5V

Heater thermistor 1 detect signal

+5V

Heater thermistor 2 detect signal

Heater thermistor connect detect voltage

(+3.3V:Connected)

Active

CN15 PWA-F-MAN (CN15) <-> PWA-F-RLY (CN21)

Pin No

CHK

+5V

ATH1

+5V

ATH2

THCHK

L: Constant speed

Symbol

FDS2ON

CINVD01

STH

Name

Active

H:Feeding

MEM1DET

Exit sensor output signal

+5V

L:Connected

+5V

Coin vendor control output signal 1

Heater thermistor 1 detect signal

Heater thermistor 2 detect signal

JSP stack sensor (Lower) detect signal /

OCT stack sensor detect signal /

Bridge cover stack sensor detect signal

JSP stack sensor (Upper) detect signal /

OCT separate sensor detect signal

Bridge cover exit sensor detect signal

JSP cover open switch detect signal /

OCT cover open switch detect signal /

Bridge cover relay cover open switch detect signal

JSP/OCT/Finisher detection signal

OCT motor drive signal 2

JSP paper jam sensor detect signal /

OCT paper jam sensor detect signal /

Bridge cover paper jam sensor detect signal

JSP/OCT distinction signal

Finisher detection signal

Interlock switch detect signal

+5V (for LSU drive)

5VPS

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Signal ground

JFLS1ON

CN13 PWA-F-MAN (CN13) <-> PWA-F-MEM 2 (CN106)

Pin No

CN30 PWA-F-RLY (CN30) <-> MD-MOT-AW

Pin No

Signal ground

H:Paper full

Symbol

MMTR-ON

MMTR-BRK

MMTR-RFL

PLL-OK

+5V

MMTR-DIR

MMTR-FG

Name

Main motor ON/OFF signal

Non connection

Main motor clock

Main motor synchronized signal

Signal ground

Active

L:ON

Symbol

PIXA0

PIXA2

PIXA4

PIXA6

Name

Active

PIX address bus 0

PIX address bus 2

PIX address bus 4

PIX address bus 6

PIX address bus 8

PIX address bus 10

PIX address bus 12

Optional memory PWA 2 chip select signal 2

PIX SDRAM bank select address 1 signal

PIX SDRAM RAS signal

PIX SDRAM I/O musk upper signal

Optional memory PWA 2 clock signal

PIX data bus 0

PIX data bus 2

PIX data bus 4

PIX data bus 6

PIX data bus 8

PIX data bus 10

PIX data bus 12

PIX data bus 14

Optional memory PWA 2 type detect signal

+3.3V

Signal ground

PIX address bus 1

PIX address bus 3

PIX address bus 5

PIX address bus 7

PIX address bus 9

PIX address bus 11

Optional memory PWA 2 chip select signal 1

PIX SDRAM bank select address 0 signal

PIX SDRAM write signal

PIX SDRAM CAS signal

PIX SDRAM I/O musk lower signal

PIX SDRAM clock enable signal

PIX data bus 1

PIX data bus 3

PIX data bus 5

PIX data bus 7

PIX data bus 9

JFLS2ON

H:Paper full

H:Initial position

H:Present

CN45 PWA-F-RLY (CN45) <-> EXT-SEN

Pin No

JPOSON

JCOSON

Symbol

Name

Active

H:Feeding

L: Constant speed

FDS2ON

FDSLED

Signal ground

Exit sensor output signal

PIXA8

H:Cover open

+5V

PIXA10

PIXA12

CS4XB

PBA1

Exit sensor LED illuminate voltage (+5V)

Main motor direction signal

Not used

L:CW H:CCW

JCONECT

OFSET2

JJAMSW

L:Connected

CN6 PWA-F-MAN (CN6) <-> PWA-F-FAX (CN101)

Pin No

PSDRASXR

PSDDQMUR

SDCLK2

PIXD0

PIXD2

PIXD4

PIXD6

PIXD8

PIXD10

PIXD12

PIXD14

SDRM2ID

3.3V

PIXA1

PIXA3

PIXA5

PIXA7

PIXA9

H:Paper jam

CN47 PWA-F-RLY (CN47) <-> Speaker

Pin No

Symbol

INTPM1X

Name

FAX CODEC interrupt signal

FAX CODEC input DMA request signal

Reset signal

Active

L:Jobend

Symbol

Name

Active

CN31 PWA-F-RLY (CN31) <-> SFB

Pin No

JPASSW

FSELECT

24VONOFF

LSU5V

L:JSP H:OCT

L:Connected

L:Front/Side cover open

SP+

SP-

Speaker signal (+)

Speaker signal (-)

Symbol

Name

Active

IDREQ1X

RESETX

PM1ID0

PM1ID2

PMI1D4

PM1ID6

PM1ID8

PM1ID10

PM1ID12

PM1ID14

DONE1

IOCS4X

IORDX

MDM1RES

MDRRQ1

BATVCC

BUCS

MPFCON

+24V

MPESON

+5V

MPSS3ON

MPSS2ON

MPSS1ON

MPSS0ON

Signal ground

SFB clutch ON signal (+24V)

+24V

FAX CODEC input data bus 0

FAX CODEC input data bus 2

FAX CODEC input data bus 4

FAX CODEC input data bus 6

FAX CODEC input data bus 8

FAX CODEC input data bus 10

FAX CODEC input data bus 12

FAX CODEC input data bus 14

FAX CODEC job end signal

I/O chip select 4 signal

I/O read signal

Signal ground

JSP/Bridge cover solenoid drive signal

Signal ground

CN48 PWA-F-RLY (CN48) <-> PWA-IPC (Finisher)

Pin No

SFB paper empty detect signal

+5V

H:Empty

JSSON

H:ON

L:Present

H:Open

L:Present

H:Feeding

H:Pickup completed

H:Empty

H:Brake

L:CCW H:CW

L: Constant speed

H:ON

L:OFF H:Forword/Brake

Symbol

24VF2

+5V

Name

Active

+24V (for Finisher)

Power ground

Signal ground

+5V

SFB paper size detect signal 3

SFB paper size detect signal 2

SFB paper size detect signal 1

SFB paper size detect signal 0

Signal ground

RRCON

TSMON

PUCON

COS1ON

MREQ

PFTXD

MACK/PF

PFACK

PFREQ

PFRXD

DFDS

OPRSTX

FCOSON

PSS3

Registration roller clutch drive signal

Toner supply motor drive signal

Pickup roller clutch drive signal

Toner cartridge detect signal

System control GA request to send signal

PFC transmit data signal

PFC data terminal ready signal

PFC data set ready signal

PFC request to send signal

PFC receive data signal

Paper set pre-registration signal

Optional parts reset signal

Front cover detection signal

Recording cassette detect signal

Signal ground

Not used

Feed sensor output signal

Pickup detect signal

Paper empty detect signal

Main motor brake signal

Main motor direction signal

Not used

100

MCONECT

SFB detect signal

L:Connected

CN49 PWA-F-RLY (CN49) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN5)

Pin No

Modem reset signal

Modem receive data request signal

System SDRAM backup voltage

Backup status signal

Symbol

24VF1

Name

Active

+24V (for Scanner unit)

Power ground

CN32 PWA-F-RLY (CN32) <->TC-SW

Pin No

L: Normal H: Data lost

Symbol

COS1ON

Name

Toner cartridge detect signal

Signal ground

Active

L:Present

SA2

SA4

SD0

SD2

SD4

SD6

SD8

System address bus 2

System address bus 4

System data bus 0

System data bus 2

System data bus 4

System data bus 6

System data bus 8

System data bus 10

System data bus 12

PIXA11

CS3XB

PBA0

Power ground

PSDWER

PSDCASXR

PSDDQMLR

PSDCKER

PIXD1

PIXD3

PIXD5

PIXD7

PIXD9

PIXD11

PIXD13

PIXD15

3.3V

CN50 PWA-F-RLY (CN50) <-> POW-FAN/PU-FAN

Pin No

PWRDWN

FDS1ON

LPSON

PESON

MMBRK

MMDIR

MMFG

MMCLK

MMSYNC

MMON

LUMON1

MPFCON

MPESON

MPSS2ON

MPSS0ON

MPSS1ON

FANDET

FANH

CN33 PWA-F-RLY (CN33) <-> FED-SEN

Pin No

Symbol

FANH

FANL

FANH

FANL

Name

Power supply unit fan motor drive signal

Power supply unit fan motor status signal

Process unit drive signal

Active

Symbol

Name

Active

H:Feeding

SD10

SD12

SD14

FDS1ON

+5V

DHPON

+5V

Signal ground

Feed sensor output signal

+5V

System data bus 14

PM1OD0

PM1OD2

PM1OD4

PM1OD6

PM1OD8

PM1OD10

PM1OD12

PM1OD14

OBACK1X

ODREQ1

2WRESETX

BUENA

CH01

FAX CODEC output data bus 0

FAX CODEC output data bus 2

FAX CODEC output data bus 4

FAX CODEC output data bus 6

FAX CODEC output data bus 8

FAX CODEC output data bus 10

FAX CODEC output data bus 12

FAX CODEC output data bus 14

FAX CODEC output bus acknowledge 1 signal

FAX CODEC output DMA request 1 signal

Power save circuit reset signal

Backupenablesignal

Process unit fan motor status signal

Signal ground

Not used

+5V

Main motor clock

PIX data bus 11

PIX data bus 13

PIX data bus 15

+3.3V

Signal ground

Optional memory PWA 2 detect signal

Main motor synchronized signal

Main motor ON/OFF signal

Tray-up motor drive signal 1

SFB clutch ON signal

SFB paper empty detect signal

SFB paper size detect signal 2

SFB paper size detect signal 0

SFB paper size detect signal 1

Process unit fan motor status signal

Process unit / Power supply unit fan motor

high speed drive signal

CN52 PWA-F-RLY (CN52) <-> FRCOV-SW

Pin No

Symbol

FCOSON

Name

Active

H:Open

CN34 PWA-F-RLY (CN34) <-> VCM-FAN

Pin No

Signal ground

Front cover detection signal

3.3V

MEM2DET

H:Empty

Symbol

FANH

FANL

Name

Active

Vacuum fan drive voltage

Vacuum fan status signal

L:Connected

CN53 PWA-F-RLY (CN53) <-> DRM-THM

Pin No

H:Backupdatapresent

Symbol

+5V

DTHA

Name

Active

Backup control signal (Reserve)

+5V

Drum thermistor detect signal

CN35 PWA-F-RLY (CN35) <-> PWA-PFC (CN202)

Pin No

+5V

3.3V

-12V

CN16 PWA-F-MAN (CN16) <-> Coin vendor

Pin No

Signalground

+3.3V

-12V

+12V

Analogground

FANL

Process unit / Power supply unit fan motor

low speed drive signal

Power supply unit fan motor status signal

Not used

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

Symbol

Name

Active

+24V

Power ground

+5V

COINVDI1

COINVDI2

COINVDO2

COINVDO3

COINVDO4

COINVDO5

COINVDO6

COINVDO7

COINVDO8

+5V

Signal ground

100

PSFANDET

PSFANON

SPEAKER

HTON0

HTON1

PWSV

5VPS

3.3V

-12V

+12V

+5V

OHP

CCON

DVVR

TCHON

TCVR

GVR

SPON

SPDVR

CN54 PWA-F-RLY (CN54) <-> PWA-F-DLE (In Process unit)

Pin No

Coin vendor control input signal 1

Coin vendor control input signal 2

Non connection

Coin vendor control output signal 2

Coin vendor control output signal 3

Coin vendor control output signal 4

Coin vendor control output signal 5

Coin vendor control output signal 6

Coin vendor control output signal 7

Coin vendor control output signal 8

Speaker output signal

Symbol

+24V

DEL

PUF

Name

Active

+12V

Heater lamp 1 ON signal

Heater lamp 2 ON signal

Power save control signal

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

+3.3V

Signal ground

-12V

+12V

Analog ground

+5V

Not used

Signal ground

Main charger control signal

Development bias reference signal

Transfer charger control signal

Transfer bias reference voltage signal

Grid reference voltage signal

Separation charger control signal

Separation bias reference signal

Signal ground

Paper guide plate/Pinch roller control signal

Signal ground

Not used

Tray-up motor drive signal 2

Polygonal motor clock

Polygonal motor status signal

Polygonal motor drive signal

Discharge LED array drive signal

Process unit present/absent detect signal

Process unit new/old detect signal

Process unit fuse detect signal

Drum thermistor detect signal

Toner empty sensor drive/detection signal

OCT motor drive signal 1

PFC PWA detect signal

+5V

+24V

L:ON

Signal ground

Discharge LED array drive signal

Process unit detect voltage (+24V:New PG:Old)

IBACK1X

IDACK1X

PM1PLL

PM1ID1

PM1ID3

PM1ID5

PM1ID7

PM1ID9

PM1ID11

PM1ID13

PM1ID15

IOCS9X

IOWRX

INTMD1

MDTRQ1

FAXX33M

BUCHG

SA1

FAX CODEC input bus acknowledge 1 signal

FAX CODEC input DMA acknowledge 1 signal

FAX CODEC PLL 1 signal

FAX CODEC input data bus 1

FAX CODEC input data bus 3

FAX CODEC input data bus 5

FAX CODEC input data bus 7

FAX CODEC input data bus 9

FAX CODEC input data bus 11

FAX CODEC input data bus 13

FAX CODEC input data bus 15

I/O chip select 9 signal

I/O write signal

H:Enable

Up-edge trigger

CN206 PWA-F-PFC (CN206) <-> PFP/LCF

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

Non connection

CLK-C

CLK-B

SCSW-C

DRV7

DRV6

DRV5

DRV4

DRV3

DRV2

DRV1

DRV0

PFPRST

+5V

PFP/LCF DRV register control signal C

PFP DRV register control signal B

PFP/LCF switch select signal C

PFP/LCF driver control bus 7

PFP/LCF driver control bus 6

PFP/LCF driver control bus 5

PFP/LCF driver control bus 4

PFP/LCF driver control bus 3

PFP/LCF driver control bus 2

PFP/LCF driver control bus 1

PFP/LCF driver control bus 0

PFP/LCF reset signal

CN17 PWA-F-MAN (CN17) <-> PWA-F-MAN-AU1/PWA-F-RLY-AU1

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

5VPS

+5V

Signal ground

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

+5V

Signal ground

MODEM interrupt signal

Modem transmit data request signal

FAX CODEC drive clock

Backup charge signal

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

System address bus 1

System address bus 3

System address bus 5

System data bus 1

System data bus 3

System data bus 5

System data bus 7

System data bus 9

System data bus 11

System data bus 13

+5V

Signal ground

SA3

SA5

SD1

SD3

SD5

SD7

SD9

SIZE-0

PFP cassette (Upper/Lower) switch detect signal/

LCF cassette switch detect signal

Not used

L:Present

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

SIZE-1

SIZE-2

SIZE-3

RETS-0

RETS-1

RETS-2

RETS-3

RETS-4

RETS-5

RETS-6

RETS-7

SCSW-B

PGON

Not used

CN18 PWA-F-MAN (CN18) <-> PWA-LDR (CN169)

Pin No

BAFANL

LUMON2

PMCLK

PMSTS

PMTON

DELON

DELRET

PUFRET

PUFDEL

DTH

PFP/LCF input interface bus 0

PFP/LCF input interface bus 1

PFP/LCF input interface bus 2

PFP/LCF input interface bus 3

PFP/LCF input interface bus 4

PFP/LCF input interface bus 5

PFP/LCF input interface bus 6

PFP/LCF input interface bus 7

PFP/LCF switch select signal B

Non connection

Symbol

LPWR

S/H

VIDEOX

LDENX

LSU5V

Name

Active

L:Sample H:Hold

SD11

SD13

SD15

L:OFF/Forword H:Brake

Laser power signal

Sample/Hold signal

Latent image data signal

Laser enable signal

Signal ground

+5V(for LSU drive)

Signal ground

Hsync signal

System data bus 15

L: Constant speed

L:ON

H:ON

H:Present

L:Old H:New

PM1OD1

PM1OD3

PM1OD5

PM1OD7

PM1OD9

PM1OD11

PM1OD13

PM1OD15

LSYNC1

ODACK1X

RX1

FAX CODEC output data bus 1

FAX CODEC output data bus 3

FAX CODEC output data bus 5

FAX CODEC output data bus 7

FAX CODEC output data bus 9

FAX CODEC output data bus 11

FAX CODEC output data bus 13

FAX CODEC output data bus 15

FAX CODEC line synchronized signal

FAX CODEC output DMA acknowledge 1 signal

FAX receive data signal

FAX transmit data signal

ConnectedtoAnalogground

+5V

HSYNC

TES

LCFCNT

LCF connect signal

L:Connected

OFSET1

PFCDET

BAFAN1

BAFANON

MPSS3ON

MCONECT

L:Connected

H:ON

Vacuum fan status signal

Vacuum fan drive signal

SFB paper size detect signal 3

SFB detect signal

CN207 PWA-F-PFC (CN207) <-> PFP/LCF

Pin No

TX1

PWA-F-PIF

CN1 PWA-F-PIF (CN1) <-> PC

Pin No

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

CH02

L:Connected

+24V

Power ground

+5V

Symbol

nStrobe

Name

PC I/F nStrobe/HostClk signal

Parallel data bus 1

Parallel data bus 2

Parallel data bus 3

Parallel data bus 4

Parallel data bus 5

Parallel data bus 6

Parallel data bus 7

Active

Signalground

FAX PWA detect signal

+3.3V (Backup)

+3.3V

-12V

FAXDET

3.3VB

L:Connected

PWA-F-PFC

CN203 PWA-F-PFC (CN203) <-> ADU

Pin No

DATA1

DATA2

DATA3

DATA4

DATA5

DATA6

DATA7

DATA8

nACK

Busy

PError

Select

nAutoFd

Logic

3.3V

-12V

Symbol

FDM-D

Name

ADU motor (Lower) drive signal D

ADU motor (Lower) drive signal B

ADU motor (Lower) drive signal C

ADU motor (Lower) drive signal A

Not used

ADU paper jam sensor (Lower) detect signal

+5V

Signal ground

Active

H:Feeding

L:Connected

H:Feeding

H:Open

+12V

5VPS

+12V

CN208 PWA-F-PFC (CN208) <-> PFU

Pin No

A10

A11

FDM-B

FDM-C

FDM-A

CRT-DOWNA

ADUFL

+5V

+5V (When Power saver mode = Supplied)

Notused

Symbol

Name

Active

H:Empty

PFUPEMP

+5V

PFUTUP

+5V

PFUPCLT

+24V

+5V

SIZPFU1

PFUCNT

Signal ground

PFU paper empty sensor detect signal

+5V

Parallel data bus 8

PC I/F nAck/PtrClk/PerihClk signal

PC I/F Busy/PtrBusy/PerihAck signal

PC I/F PError/AckDataReq/nAckReverse signal

PC I/F Select/Xflag signal

PC I/F nAutoFd/HostBusy/HostAck signal

Non connection

Signal ground

Frame ground

Pull up (5VPS)

Signal ground

PC I/F nInit/nReverseRequest signal

PC I/F nFault/DataAvail/nPeriphRequest signal

Non connection

Signal ground

CN19 PWA-F-MAN (CN19) <-> PWA-F-RLY (CN51)

Pin No

PFU pickup sensor detect signal

+5V

PFU pickup clutch drive signal

+24V

H:Pickup completed

Symbol

+24V

Name

Active

ADCNT

ADUFU

ADUCOVSW

EXM-A

EXM-C

EXM-B

EXM-D

ADU connect signal

Power ground

+24V

L:ON

ADU paper jam sensor (Upper) detect signal

ADU cover open switch detect signal

ADU motor (Upper) drive signal A

ADU motor (Upper) drive signal C

ADU motor (Upper) drive signal B

ADU motor (Upper) drive signal D

+5V

Not used

Signal ground

PFU connect signal

Non connection

L:Connected

L:Present

H:Open

L:OFF/Forword H:Brake

L:OFF H:Forword/Brake

SIZUPFU0

PFUCOV

PFU cassette switch detect signal

Signal ground

PFU cover open switch detect signal

Signal ground

CN204 PWA-F-PFC (CN204) <-> ADU

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

B10

B11

+24V

Signal ground

+24V

Non connection

nInit

nFault

PFUTRM-A

PFUTRM-B

PFU tray-up motor drive signal A

PFU tray-up motor drive signal B

Non connection

+24V

Signal ground

CN205 PWA-F-PFC (CN205) <-> OCF-SEN/OCF-CLT

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

H:Feeding

L:ON

PFUFD-SW

+5V

PFUDCLT

+24V

Signal ground

2nd feed roller sensor detect signal

+5V

2nd feed roller clutch drive signal

+24V

nSelectIn

PC I/F nSelectin/1284 active signal

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

Appendix A. Specifications

• Copy process ................ Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)

• Type .............................. Desktop type (console type when the paper feed pedestal and Large

capacity feeder are installed)

• Original table ................. Fixed table (the left rear corner used for standard original placement)

• Acceptable originals ...... Type: sheet, book, and 3-dimensional object.

However, the automatic document feeder (option) only accepts sheets of

paper (Multi-sheet: 50 - 105 g/m², or 13 - 29 lb/Single-sheet: 105 - 127

g/m², or 29 - 34 lb.), excluding carbon paper, pasted sheets and stapled

sheets.

Max size: A3/LD

• Copy speed

e-STUDIO160 series

Paper

supply

Paper

size

(Copies/min.)

Bypass feeding (SFB)

No paper size Paper size

Upper PFU

cassette

PFP

Upper Lower cassette

LCF

cassette

(with CM)

designated

A4, LT

A4-R

LT-R

A3, LD

e-STUDIO200 series

(Copies/min.)

Paper

supply

Upper PFU

cassette

PFP

Upper Lower cassette

LCF

Bypass feeding (SFB)

No paper size Paper size

Paper

size

cassette

(with CM)

designated

A4, LT

A4-R

LT-R

A3, LD

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

A - 1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e-STUDIO250 series

(Copies/min.)

Bypass feeding (SFB)

No paper size Paper size

Paper

supply

Upper PFU

cassette

PFP

Upper Lower cassette

LCF

Paper

size

cassette

(with CM)

designated

A4, LT

A4-R

LT-R

24.6

A3, LD

* "-" shows "Cannot be used".

* The copy speeds in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single-

side, multiple copying.

• System copy speed

Copy mode

(Copies/min.)

e-STUDIO160 e-STUDIO200 e-STUDIO250

series

Single-sided originals

1 set

3 sets

Single-sided copies (Non sort) 5 sets

Single-sided originals

1 set

3 sets

5 sets

Two-sided copies (Sort)

Two-sided originals

1 set

3 sets

5 sets

Single-sided copies (Sort)

Two-sided originals

1 set

3 sets

5 sets

Two-sided copies (Sort)

* Copy speeds include the first copy time.

They are available when the copy modes in the above table are selected and 10 LT-size originals

are set in the automatic document feeder.

• Copy paper

Cassette Duplexing

Bypass copy

Remarks

Size

A3 - A5-R, FOLIO

LD - ST-R, COM

A3 - A5-R, FOLIO

LD - ST-R, COM

Weight

64 - 80 g/m²

17 - 21 lbs

Continuous copy: 64 - 80 g/m², 17 - 21 lbs

Single copy:

80 - 163 g/m², 21 - 43 lbs

Special paper

—

Recommended OHP film/Thick paper

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

A - 2

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO160 series: Less than 7.9 seconds (A4/LT, the Upper cas-

sette, 100%, original placed manually)

e-STUDIO200 series: Less than 7.0 seconds (A4/LT, the Upper cas-

sette, 100%, original placed manually)

e-STUDIO250 series: Less than 7.0 seconds (A4/LT, the Upper cas-

sette, 100%, original placed manually)

• Warming-up time .................. e-STUDIO160 series: Less than 60 seconds

e-STUDIO200 series: Less than 75 seconds

e-STUDIO250 series: Less than 75 seconds

• Multiple copying ................... Up to 999 copies; entry by numeric keys

• Reproduction ratio................ Actual ratio: 100%

Zooming: 50 - 200% in increments of 1%

25 - 400% in increments of 1%

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series; with original cover)

• Resolution/Gradation ........... Read:

600 dpi x 600 dpi

Copy:

Printer:

Fax:

600 dpi x 600 dpi

1200 dpi x 600 dpi

16 dot/mm x 15.4 dot/mm (406 dpi x 392 dpi)

• Paper feeding....................... Automatic feeding:

e-STUDIO160 series:

Copier’s cassette 1 piece standard

Expandable up to 3 pieces by installing

optional cassettes.

e-STUDIO200/250 series:Expandable up to 4 pieces by installing

optional cassettes.

PFU-optional (Stack height 60.5 mm, Equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to

80 g/m²(17 to 21 lb.))

PFP-optional (Stack height 60.5 mm, Equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to

80 g/m²(17 to 21 lb.))

LCF-optional (Stack height 165 mm, Equivalent to 1250 x 2 sheets;

64 to 80 g/m²(17 to 21 lb.))

Bypass feeding (Stack height 16 mm, Equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to

80 g/m²(17 to 21 lb.))

• Capacity of originals of

automatic document feeder .. A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, ST-R: 50 sheets (with ADF)

B4, Folio, LG, Comp, A3, LD: 50 sheets (with ADF)

A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, ST-R: 100 sheets (with RADF)

B4, Folio, LG, Comp, A3, LD:

100 sheets (with RADF)

• Toner supplying .................... Automatic toner sensor detection

• Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 7

steps

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

A - 3

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Weight ................................ Standard:

50 Kg (110 lb.) (with Process unit/Toner cartridge)

Full system: 92 Kg (203 lb.) (e-STUDIO160 series)/

124 Kg (273 lb.) (e-STUDIO200/250 series)

• Power requirements ........... 115VAC, 50Hz/60Hz

120VAC, 50Hz/60Hz

127VAC, 50Hz/60Hz

220-240VAC, 50Hz/60Hz

• Power consumption ............ 1.4 KW or less

• Dimensions: ....................... (W) x (D) x (H) mm

e-STUDIO160 series

e-STUDIO200/250 series

530 x 554 x 600 mm

530 x 554 x 643 mm

530 x 554 x 731 mm

545 x 599 x 772 mm

607 x 599 x 772 mm

530 x 554 x 757 mm

530 x 554 x 1039 mm

604 x 554 x 643 mm

801 x 554 x 643 mm

604 x 554 x 643 mm

787 x 554 x 676 mm

957 x 554 x 643 mm

Standard

530 x 554 x 600 mm

530 x 554 x 643 mm

530 x 554 x 731 mm

545 x 599 x 772 mm

607 x 599 x 772 mm

530 x 554 x 757 mm

Standard + Original cover

Standard + ADF

Standard + RADF

Standard + ADU + RADF

Standard + Original cover + PFU

Standard + Original cover + PFU + PFP 530 x 554 x 1039 mm

Standard + Original cover + JSP

Standard + Original cover + SFB

Standard + Original cover + OCT

Standard + Original cover + Stapler

Standard + Original cover + Finisher

604 x 554 x 643 mm

801 x 554 x 643 mm

604 x 554 x 643 mm

787 x 554 x 676 mm

-----

e-STUDIO160 series

03-3

03-4

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

A - 4

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e-STUDIO200/250 series

T-808

T-101-2

Appendix B. Accessories

Setup instructions

Operator’s manual

Setup report

1pc.

1pc. (for NAD and MJD)

Warranty sheet

CS card

1pc. (for NAD)

1pc. (for MJD)

1pc.

Process unit

Toner cartridge

Detouchable power cord

1pc.

* Machine version

NAD: North America

MJD: Europe

AUD: Australia

ASD: Asia

SAD: Saudi Arabia

CND: China

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

A - 5

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C. Options

Original cover

KA-1600PC, KA-1600PC-N

KD-1009, KD-1009-N

MD-0101, MD-0101-N

MR-2012, MR-2012-N

Paper feed pedestal-1 (PFP)

Automatic duplexing unit-1(ADU)

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Reverse automatic document feeder-1 (RADF) MR-3011

Paper feed unit (PFU)

Cassette module (CM)

MY-1015, MY-1015-N

MY-1017, MY-1017-N

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

KD-1010, KD-1010-N

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

GH-1030, GH-1030-N

MJ-5001, MJ-5001-N

MJ-5002, MJ-5002-N

MY-1016, MY-1016-N

GA-1031

Large capacity feeder (LCF)

Paper feed controller (PFC)

Job separator (JSP)

Offset tray

Stack feed bypass (SFB)

Printer kit (Printer control)

Memory kit

GC-1050, GC-1050-N

GD-1061-EU, GD-1061-NA, GD-1061-AU,

GD-1060-SA, GD-1061C

GD-1070

Fax board kit

Internet fax kit

NIC kit (Network interface card)

Staple with surface

Finisher

GF-1110

KK-1600

MJ-1011 (for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Appendix D. Replacement Units/Supplies

(1) Replacement units

Fuser unit

FUSER-1600-120, FUSER-1600-240 (for e-STUDIO160 series)

FUSER-2500-120, FUSER-2500-240 (for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Transfer charger unit MAIN-CH-1600

(2) Process unit

Process unit

PU-1610S, PU-1610ES, PU-1610DS, PU-1610DSN, PU-1610CS

(3) Supplies

Toner cartridge

T-1600, T-1600E, T-1600D, T-1600C (for e-STUDIO160 series)

T-2500, T-2500E, T-2500D, T-2500C (for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

A - 6

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E. System List

Automatic document feeder

(ADF)

MR-2012, MR-2012-N

Reverse automatic document feeder

Original cover

KA-1600PC, KA-1600PC-N

(RADF)

MR-3011

Stapler with surface

KK-1600

Finisher kit

(Hanging type)

MJ-1011

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)

MD-0101, MD-0101-N

Job separator

(JSP) (Inner type)

MJ-5001, MJ-5001-N

e-STUDIO160/200/250

series

Stack feed bypass

(SFB)

MY-1016, MY-1016-N

1st cassette (Std.)

Offset tray (Inner type)

MJ-5002, MJ-5002-N

Paper feed controller (PFC)

GH-1030, GH-1030-N

Memory kit

GC-1050, GC-1050-N

2nd cassette

Paper feed unit (PFU)

MY-1015, MY-1015-N

Printer kit (Printer control)

GA-1031

3rd cassette

LCF

Network interface card kit (NIC)

GF-1110

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Paper size: A4/LT

NIC

Relay board

Large capacity feeder

KD-1010, KD-1010-N

Paper feed pedestal

(PFP)

Fax board kit

GD-1061-EU, GD-1061-NA

GD-1061-AU, GD-1061-SA

GD-1061C

KD-1009, KD-1009-N

NCU

board

FAX

board

Operation

panel

4th cassette

(for e-STUDIO200/250 series)

Cassette module (CM)

MY-1017, MY-1017-N

Internet fax kit

GD-1070

01-05-01

Fig. E-1

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

A - 7

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix F. Power Supply Unit

1. Outline

The power supply unit provides AC and DC power for each part of this machine. The unit is made up of

the following circuits.

Main switch

ASD/AUD/CND/SAD models

CN4

Power supply unit

Interlock switch Interlock switch

(

)

(

)

Side cover

Front cover

DC output circuit

Scanner

dump heater

C/O-IN

FUS PWA

C/O-OU

20A/125V

NAD/SAD models

10A/250V

(

)

(

)

24VSW

+24V

(

)

ASD/AUD/CND/MJD models

)

Entrance

AC/I/L

AC/I/N

(

)

4A/125V NAD/SAD models

Noise

filter

(

)

4A/250V ASD/AUD/CND/MJD models

filter

24VFU2

Switching

reguretor

circuit

(

)

4A/125V NAD/SAD models

4A/250V ASD/AUD/CND/MJD models

(

)

24VFU1

DP2000/2500 series

PWS

AC/O/L

AC/O/N

Stapler

(

)

Option

12V

-12V

5VPS

Relay PWA

Switching

regurator

circuit

Fuser

Heater lamp drive circuit

3.3V

Fuser thermostat 1

10,13,14,15

Fuser thermostat 2

Heater lamp 1

HN1

Heater lamp

control circuit 1

8,18,19

HT1ON

HT2ON

HN1

Heater lamp

control circuit 2

Heater lamp 2

ASD/AUD/CND/MJD models

15-01-02

Fig. F-1

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

A - 8

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. DC Output Circuit

This circuit converts the AC voltage input from the inlet to each DC voltage (+24V, +12V, -12V, +5V,

+3.3V) and delivers it to each part of the machine. Turning on the main switch causes the supply of all

DC voltages to begin.

Each DC voltage is supplied or cut off when the Power Save mode is activated or the following covers are

opened or closed as shown in the table below.

DC Voltage

Voltage

Value (V)

+24

In Power Save mode Front Cover Side Cover

(PWS signal = Low)

= Open

24VSW

24VFU2

24VFU1

24V

+24

+12

-12

12V

-12V

5VPS

3.3V

+3.3

: Output - : Cut off

Output Protection

An overcurrent and an overvoltage protective circuit are configured for each DC voltage output. If the

output is shorted for some reason or an abnormal condition occurs in a circuit, these circuits prevent

overcurrent and overvoltage from flowing through the entire circuitry of this machine.

December 2002 TOSHIBA TEC

A - 9

e-STUDIO160/200/250 APPENDIX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8842 JAPAN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Targus Mouse AMB09US User Manual
Tektronix Printer PHASER 780 User Manual
Toastmaster Hot Beverage Maker RHEKRET User Manual
Tonka Motorized Toy Car ATV User Manual
Toshiba CRT Television 19W330DG User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD 2150 User Manual
Turbo Chef Technologies Oven NGC 1007 User Manual
Vornado Humidifier EVAP2 User Manual
VTech Telephone CS5111 2 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Carpet Cleaner VHX10G User Manual